<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<itemContainer xmlns="http://omeka.org/schemas/omeka-xml/v5" xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xsi:schemaLocation="http://omeka.org/schemas/omeka-xml/v5 http://omeka.org/schemas/omeka-xml/v5/omeka-xml-5-0.xsd" uri="https://omeka.ibu.edu.ba/items/browse?output=omeka-xml&amp;page=39&amp;sort_field=Dublin+Core%2CCreator" accessDate="2026-06-06T02:48:37+01:00">
  <miscellaneousContainer>
    <pagination>
      <pageNumber>39</pageNumber>
      <perPage>10</perPage>
      <totalResults>3494</totalResults>
    </pagination>
  </miscellaneousContainer>
  <item itemId="485" public="1" featured="0">
    <fileContainer>
      <file fileId="508">
        <src>https://omeka.ibu.edu.ba/files/original/46157a416d9d60e83808020c541991cc.pdf</src>
        <authentication>6b310361d1c5399efc9f0b73394a3156</authentication>
        <elementSetContainer>
          <elementSet elementSetId="4">
            <name>PDF Text</name>
            <description/>
            <elementContainer>
              <element elementId="52">
                <name>Text</name>
                <description/>
                <elementTextContainer>
                  <elementText elementTextId="3731">
                    <text>Journal of Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics

“Teaching Translation Theory outside Europe: Historical
Specificity Versus Universal Applicability”
James St. André
The University of Manchester, United Kingdom
Submitted: 22.04.2014.
Accepted: 04.11.2014.
Abstract
While teaching first in Singapore and now in Manchester, it has come to my attention
that there are certain difficulties in teaching translation theory either outside of
Europe or, in Europe, to students from outside of Europe who come here to study.
This paper concentrates on the role of examples in theoretical works, the problems
they pose in teaching theory and the implications for universalism in translation
studies. I draw on Edward Said’s discussion of travelling theory, post-colonial
critiques of the hegemonic role of English, and skopos theory to propose two courses
of action to help overcome the problem: first, the incorporation of the translation of
theoretical material both from and into European languages as part of practical
postgraduate training; and second, the use of a radical substitution policy for
examples, with new examples centred around the target language, rather than
preservation of the original examples, which are centred around the source-language.
Using the example of China, I will demonstrate how these two strategies push us to
reconsider how we approach teaching theory. Firstly, the translation of Chinese
theoretical texts into English will allow for a deeper appreciation of writings in
Chinese and their wider dissemination. Secondly, the search for examples which
involve the target language should lead to an engagement between the target culture
and the theory. Translating Vinay and Darbelnet’s path breaking essay on translation
processes, for example, immediately raises the question of what exactly is meant by
‘borrowing’ in the Chinese context, and for the need to distinguish between retaining
the use of the roman alphabet and transliteration using Chinese characters, a
distinction that would never arise between French, English and German.
Keywords: translation theory, examples, Chinese

Introduction
Although not a specialist in foreign language acquisition or in teaching English as a
foreign language, I have long been concerned with the teaching of theoretical texts in
131

�“Teaching Translation Theory outside Europe: Historical Specificity Versus Universal Applicability”

translation studies to non-native speakers of English. These theoretical texts include
translations from other languages (mainly German and French) into English, as well
as translations from English into Chinese (which is my main foreign language, and
the one most commonly shared by my students).
Teaching such theoretical texts raises a variety of issues, in particular the question of
examples and the problem of historical specificity versus universal applicability. For
over a century, we have seen the imposition of Western European theoretical
‘universals’ on the ‘East’, the ‘South’ or ‘the Rest’ (depending on which term you
prefer). Tackling the challenge of development of universals today involves making
models that come out of a wider range of experience across the humanities and social
sciences. In translation studies in particular, there is a need to go beyond the
triumvirate of English, French and German studies, and to go beyond East and West.
In a postmodern vein, I begin this paper with a story of a young American who went
to Asia to teach translation and how that experience changed his perception of his
chosen field of study. You should detect in this preamble a very heavy whiff of
postcolonialism.
After that preamble, I discuss briefly some of the arguments for and against
universalism in the humanities and social sciences in general. Then I lay out some of
the more recent arguments in favour of universalism, especially in computational
linguistics and their application to translation studies. The final section of the paper
will be a discussion of how and why we might or might not want to continue looking
for universals in translation studies, and how historical specificity might engage with
it, taking into account various factors, including: the (non) translation of translation
theory East-West; the importance of examples and case studies in translation theory;
the importance of religion as a grounding for Universalism; and a modified view of
what ‘universal’ means in the field today.

Anecdote
In 1999 I was hired by the department of Chinese Studies at the National University
of Singapore to teach all levels of translation. Since primary and secondary education
in Singapore is now in English, with ethnic Chinese students taking Mandarin
Chinese as their required ‘Mother Tongue’ subject, there is a large bilingual EnglishChinese population there. Students in the Chinese department thus generally having
fairly good skills in both languages, and Singaporean undergraduates are eminently
suited for a translation programme.
For the advanced module, I assigned three essays from Venuti’s Translation Studies
Reader (2000) that I considered to be, if not easy, at least clearly written and engaged
132

�Journal of Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics

with specific strategies of translation: Jean-Paul Vinay and Jean Darbelnet, “A
Methodology for Translation” (1958/2000), Katharina Reiss “Type, Kind and
Individuality of Text: Decision making in translation” (1971/2000) and Hans
Vermeer “Skopos and Commission in Translational Action” (1989/2000).
To my surprise, the students claimed that the essays were extremely difficult, if not
incomprehensible, and my plans for in-class discussion went nowhere. When I
pressed them as to what exactly they had trouble following, it turned out that the
main problem was the examples that the authors used to illustrate their points.
All three essays had been translated: Vinay and Darbelnet from French, the articles
by Reiss and by Vermeer from German. More importantly, all three essays contained
concrete examples, which I had thought would make the theoretical model easier to
understand. However, the translators of all three articles had left these examples in
their original form, ie, a combination of French, German, Spanish, and English.
Reiss’s article was possibly the most difficult, because most of her examples were of
translation between French and German, or German by itself, with no translation into
English. Perhaps because I have a reading knowledge of these languages, I had not
noticed the oddity of presenting an essay in English where the examples, which were
supposed to illustrate the theoretical premises, were all between two foreign
languages. The article by Vinay and Darbelnet was slightly better, because all the
examples were English-French, so the students could at least understand one half of
each example, and the article by Vermeer did not contain as many examples.
Subsequently, we worked through each section of the essays, coming up with
English-Chinese examples to supplement the texts, which then resulted in the
students understanding them much better, but also led to the result (surprising to me
at the time) that not all of the points that the theorists had to make were relevant to
Chinese-English translation. Yet all of these models were couched in the language of
universal applicability.
Vinet and Darbelnet are typical in this respect, beginning their article by stating: “At
first the different methods or procedures seem to be countless, but they can be
condensed to just seven, each one corresponding to a higher degree of complexity.”
(1958/2000: 84) The remainder of the article consists of discussing each of the seven
types, with examples of how these seven techniques can solve (presumably) any and
all difficulties a translator might encounter. There is no indication that there might be
exceptions, either in the sense of a text posing a problem that one or more of these
seven techniques cannot solve, or in the sense of there being alternative techniques
which might produce different but equally valid translations. They end their paper
with a table that sets out the seven techniques by ‘level of difficulty”, but which also
enumerates how on “the three planes of expression” (ie lexis, structures, and
message) these techniques are valid (1958/2000: 92). Here again the use of the
133

�“Teaching Translation Theory outside Europe: Historical Specificity Versus Universal Applicability”

definite article ‘the” suggests that there are only these three planes, thereby
strengthening the universalist claims of their seven techniques to solve all possible
problems.
Reiss, in turn, says that text-type is a phenomenon going beyond a single linguistic or
cultural context, because the following essentially different forms of written
communication may be regarded as being present in every speech community with a
culture based on the written word and also because every author of a text ought to
decide in principle on one of the three forms before beginning to formulate his text.
(1971/2000: 163, my italics)
Clearly the repetition of ‘every’ suggests that Reiss believes she is describing a
universal phenomenon, and she goes on to list exactly three of them. Vermeer,
similarly, opens his article with sentences that contain phrases such as “any form of
translational action”, “[a]ny action has an aim”, and “[t]he aim of any translational
action”. (1989/2000: 221, my italics), all of which demonstrate his belief that skopos
theory is valid for all translational activity. Furthermore, the article contains an
explicit defense of its universal applicability. Having been criticized (Vermeer does
not specify who the critics were), he mounts a two-pronged defense, insisting both
that all actions have an aim (1989/2000: 224-5) and that all translations, even of
literature, have an intention (1989/2000: 226-7). All three articles make these strong
universal claims with the help of examples from just four modern European
languages.
It was the difficulty I experienced teaching this material in Singapore that first
aroused my interest in the relation between the particular and the universal in
translation theory. Currently in Manchester, I have noticed again that the non-native
speakers of English from non Western-European countries often have similar
problems in a module I teach, Translation and Interpreting Studies II. As a result, I
now teach a module entitled “Practicum: Translating Theory” in which we address
this specific problem.
I will return to look at some passages from these texts in more detail later in this
paper; in particular, I have a few suggestions as to what might be done about those
translations. First, however, I need to make a detour to discuss universalism as a
general phenomenon in the human sciences.

The urge to universalism
Almost all theoretical models aspire to universalism, because all theoretical models
are an attempt to generalize from the specific. The more widely applicable a theory
is, the more powerful it is. There are many possible examples, but to choose just one,
134

�Journal of Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics

we might examine post-colonial theory. Post-colonialism began as a movement
among intellectuals living in, originally from, or studying the history of the Indian
Subcontinent; an earlier term used to describe it was subaltern studies. That name
derives from their attempt to theorize the development of Indian history under
colonial rule, when the Indians were subalterns to the British, using Gramsci’s
theoretical framework as a basis of their critique (see Guha 1982a, 1982b, and Guha
1983). The term ‘subaltern studies’, which was fairly specific to that historical time
and place, was gradually replaced by the more general term post-colonial studies. At
the same time, the scope of ‘post’ in post-colonial was expanded (or generalized) in
three ways. First, from what was originally conceived rather narrowly as countries
which had been colonized by European powers but were now independent, the term
came to refer to the entire history of colonial and post-colonial rule in such countries;
in this sense ‘post’ meant ‘after the beginning of colonialism’ not ‘after the end of
colonialism’. (Robinson 1997: 13) Second, from the originally specific European
colonialism, post-colonialism was also used to refer to, and theorize about, the
colonial relation in any time period and by any country, not just European. (ibid: 1314) Third, the term was metaphorized so that it could refer to situations where,
although there was not strictly speaking a colonial situation (one country controlling
another, including sending significant numbers of people to live for a period of time,
if not permanently) to many types of unequal power relations (ibid: 14). So for
example we can now talk about one culture having a post-colonial relation with
another; we can also use the term post-colonial to refer to situations such as Russia’s
relation to the Eastern Block during the Cold War. Paulina Gasior’s paper at a recent
conference in Prague (2009), which proposes that the relationship between Eastern
and Western Europe today can be characterized as post-colonial, and that therefore a
post-colonial framework can be used to examine translations between Polish and
English or French, illustrates how post-colonialism can be used in such a
metaphorical sense. At present, then, post-colonial has developed from what was
originally a very narrow historical and temporal period (trying to understand modern
India in terms of the after-effects of British colonial rule) to a set of theoretical
assumptions and methodological tools that aspires to be universally applicable to an
extremely wide array of historical phenomena.
In effect, everyone theorist dreams of coming up with something like Newton’s laws
of gravity, which are seen as being universally applicable to all physical objects in
the universe. Certainly we can say that, in its weaker form (ie, generalization)
universalism is a necessary tendency in human thought. It is unimaginable that we
could make sense of the world if we could not group things together and say that, for
all intents and purposes, these things are identical in respect to certain properties, and
therefore can be treated as identical. The problem occurs when that urge to
universalize erases important differences, or when a theoretical model can not in fact
adequately describe dissimilar phenomena as similar.
135

�“Teaching Translation Theory outside Europe: Historical Specificity Versus Universal Applicability”

The attack on universalism
As my reference to Newton indicates, the ‘gold standard’ for universalism has been
the sciences since at least the nineteenth century, if not earlier. The apogee of this
valuation of science as providing universal knowledge came perhaps in the first half
of the twentieth century with the emergence of logical positivism, or logical
empiricism, which tried to exclude all non-scientific knowledge from having any
truth value (Uebel 2008). This did not, however, prevent theorists in the humanities
from pursuing universal theories; rather, the link between science and truth in logical
positivism inspired a decidedly scientific turn in certain fields of the humanities,
including linguistics and therefore the emergent field of translation studies, and
perhaps an even more ambitious desire to map out universals in those fields. Quine’s
work on the philosophy of language, and its influence in translation studies, is but
one example.1
However, even as universalism in both the sciences and the humanities tried to make
ever more ambitious claims, it came under attack in the twentieth century from a
variety of angles.
In the sciences, twentieth-century advances in both physics and mathematics were
interpreted, paradoxically, as undermining truth claims. In physics, Einstein’s theory
of relativity proved that Copernicus’s laws of motion were only special cases under
‘ordinary’ conditions, and that in other situations they did not necessarily hold. The
theory of relativity itself claims to be universally valid; however, it was and
continues to be interpreted popularly as proving that everything is relative and that
therefore there is no absolute truth. In addition, Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle,
which states that it is impossible to know both the position and the momentum of a
particle (Hilgevoord 2008), was similarly interpreted as meaning that scientific
knowledge could not be absolute and therefore could not make universal claims. Yet
Hilgevoord states at the beginning of his article on the uncertainty principle that
“Quantum mechanics is generally regarded as the physical theory that is our best
candidate for a fundamental and universal description of the physical world.” (2008)
Thus quantum mechanics itself (for which Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle is one
of the foundational elements) makes strong claims to universal truth.
Turning to mathematics, it was mainly the work of Gödel and Tarski in the 1920s
and 1930s that raised problems. Gödel’s two incompleteness theorems and Tarski’s
theorem of the indefinability of truth (which builds partly on Gödel’s work; see
Gómez-Torrente 2008) led to a radical, if limited, undermining of the definability of
1

Quine 1960; see Uebel 2008 for the way in which Quine was influenced by, but critical of, the Vienna
Circle and some of their tenets of logical positivism.

136

�Journal of Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics

truth in arithmetic (Kennedy 2008). The ways in which Gödel and Tarski’s work
limits truth functions and universal claims in mathematics is limited to axiomatic
systems (Shalizi 2009). However, as Shalizi also points out, it has been used
fallaciously to argue that there is “some profound limitation on knowledge, science,
mathematics” imposed by the theorems (Shalizi 2009). Sokal and Bricmont (1999:
176-81) provide an example of such a use of Gödel’s theorems in the social sciences.
Although scholars in the humanities may or may not understand quantum physics
and theoretical mathematics, these theories, and the layman’s interpretation of them,
have been used to caution against scientific ‘truth’ as absolute or universal. This view
of scientific truth as ‘relative’ has been reinforced by the work of historians,
sociologists and anthropologists of science.
In the history of science, Philip Kuhn, in The Structure of Scientific Revolutions
(1962), proposed the notion of paradigm shift. According to Kuhn, scientists shift
from one paradigm to another, with different paradigms capable of explaining
phenomena in different ways in varying degrees of usefulness.2 There is thus a strong
suggestion that all paradigms are approximations of reality as we observe it, not
Truth with a capital ‘T’. More recently, the work of Helen Longino (1990), Bruno
Latour and Steven Woolgar (1986), and others have insisted upon the inescapable
social element to scientific knowledge, challenging its claims to absolute, universal
truth (for an overview see Longino 2008).
These developments in history and sociology of science were linked to a more
general post-structural trend in the social sciences. In particular, a distrust of ‘master
narratives’ emerged. In history, for example, Hayden White (1973) attacked the idea
that the historian was an objective collector of facts that were already out there as a
myth. Instead, he saw all history as story-telling, often based on archetypal stories or
myths. The subjectivity of the historian thus precluded any hope of reaching a
description of what ‘really happened’, or an objective Truth.
White’s work is only one example of the ‘post’ movement: post-modernism, poststructuralism, post-colonialism, and deconstruction. Key to post-colonialism was the
resistance to hegemony and received notions of truth. Post-structuralism sought to
challenge the universal theoretical assumptions of structuralism. Post-modernism
argued for the disappearance of “Truth” to be replaced by ‘truths’; and Derrida and
For example, although scientists may believe that Einstein’s model of the universe is more accurate
than Copernicus’s, the vast majority of people, including physicists, live out their daily lives as if in a
Copernican universe; moreover, a modern-day physicist sailing in a boat at night out of sight of land,
using stars to navigate, is basing her decisions of how to steer on a Ptolemaic universe, wherein the stars
are fixed points in the heavens and can thus be used to guide a traveler. Thanks to Douglas Allchin,
personal communication, for this example.
2

137

�“Teaching Translation Theory outside Europe: Historical Specificity Versus Universal Applicability”

others sought to dismantle the entire Western philosophical tradition, upon which
claims for scientific and universal truths had been built. Finally, more recently, the
New Historicism and Cultural Materialism have again insisted upon the historical
situatedness of knowledge.
The essay by J. Hillis Miller, “Border Crossings, Translating Theory: Ruth” (1996) is
a good example of these trends, demonstrating both the power and the problems of
post-structuralist arguments, like the worm Ouroboros. Miller argues that all literary
theory is grounded in the interpretation of particular texts, and that therefore literary
theory is untranslatable. Miller gives the examples of Derrida’s notion of
dissemination as having been developed as a response to the poetry of Mallarmé, and
Paul de Man’s “Resistance to Theory” as being rooted in his reading of the word
‘fall’ in Keats’s The Fall of Hyperion (1996: 213). For Miller, there is thus always a
tension between the universal pretensions of theory and its origins in specific
historical and cultural knowledge. This means that, like any linguistic utterance, a
theoretical model is always liable to distortion in the process of transmission from
one culture to the next; there is not some meta-language of theory, as there is of
mathematics. Yet Miller’s essay itself could be seen as falling prey to the same
problem: he claims universal validity for his thesis that all theoretical models are
inseparable from their roots. However, that thesis in turn emerges from the reading of
a specific text: the story of Ruth in the Bible.
Miller’s argument about the impossibility of translating theory is situated at the
beginning of an article on traveling theory. While discussing the impossibility of
translating theory, Miller also notes that, of course, theory continues to be translated
all the time despite the problematic relation between universal and particular in
theoretical discourse. This leads him to a discussion of the dangers of doing so,
mainly in terms of cultural contamination or cultural colonialism. However, for
Miller, there is another danger: that the theorist will lose control of his theory. I use
the pronoun ‘he’ advisedly, because Miller is obviously talking about himself; he
makes specific mention, more than once, of the fact that his own work has been
translated into languages he does not read, like Chinese, and that he does not know
what has happened to his theory in this process. There is, then, a contested power
relation involved between author and translator, with Miller exhibiting a deep unease
at the idea that ‘his’ work is circulating in forms that he cannot control.
All in all, developments in mathematics, physics, history and sociology of science,
and the ‘post-’ movement in the humanities led to universalism taking quite a beating
in the second half of the twentieth century.

The emergence of a new universalism
138

�Journal of Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics

Developing in parallel to some of the events mentioned above, there has been
continued interest in universalism, in some cases coming from a new direction:
quantitative methods.
The modern science of statistics and probability is a relatively young discipline,
gradually evolving from several different areas between the seventeenth and early
twentieth centuries. Stigler (1986) charts how at least three different impetuses (a
flurry of interest in games of chance; the need to record exact measurements in the
sciences, especially astronomy; the demands by emergent nation states to understand
and control large populations through the collection and interpretation of census
data) led to the development of sophisticated mathematical techniques for dealing
with information in this new form.
Statistics depends on the ability to count large numbers of things, breaking down
information into simple, discrete categories that can be quantified. A typical
example, and one of the earliest broad uses of these methods as applied to human
activity, is the census. In a census, people are not treated as individuals having a
history; they are treated as a collection of discrete bits of information (sex, race, age,
profession, marital status, number of dependents, etc). Breaking someone down into
these categories and quantifying them allows for easy manipulation of information
and the generation of statistical knowledge (X% of the population is male; P% are
under the age of 20; Q% are married; the average number of offspring is W). Such
information could be enormously useful for many reasons. In London, the beginnings
of the census were the Bills of Mortality, statistics regarding deaths that were
collected to predict new outbreaks of the plague. It quickly came to be used in a
variety of hard sciences, and was responsible for the emergence of most of the social
sciences, which developed various tools, including mean and standard deviation, the
rule of least squares, and regression analysis to help evaluate probability and
reliability of data, to name but a few of the most common techniques (Stigler 1986).
However, it was expensive and time-consuming to collect and then to process such
data. Stigler (1986) mentions two early cases in the nineteenth century which give us
an idea of the labour involved: the Incomplete Beta Function of Baye’s equation can
be extremely difficult to calculate when certain variables are large numbers; he says
that
The first extensive tables of this function were not compiled until this century,
when the students in Karl Pearson’s laboratory were pressed into reluctant
service as ‘computers.’ A story, possibly apocryphal, still circulates in University
College London of a student who resigned in disgust after a week, telling
Pearson of his plans for a different career and announcing, ‘As far as I am
139

�“Teaching Translation Theory outside Europe: Historical Specificity Versus Universal Applicability”

concerned, the Table of the Incomplete Beta Function may stay incomplete.’
(Stigler 1986: 130)
The second involves the Ordnance Survey of England for 1858: The 1858 Ordnance
Survey of the British Isles required the reduction of an immense mass of data through
the use of least squares. The main triangulation was cast as a system of 1554
equations involving 920 unknowns. Even though they broke the system into 21
pieces of no more than 77 unknowns each before attempting a solution, the
calculations took two teams of human ‘computers,’ working independently and in
duplicate, two and a half years to complete (Stigler 1986: 158)
Therefore it was not until the advent of computers that such techniques really came
into their own, as the labour was prohibitively expensive for most researchers.
Computers are ideally suited to do the ‘grunt’ work of statistical analysis, since of
course computers are digital technology and therefore are most easily used to
manipulate figures, performing in nanoseconds complex operations on huge amounts
of data that might take a human being weeks.
Along with the growing importance of computing to manipulate ever-larger datasets,
sophisticated means of sampling to establish representativeness were established.
Since the 1970s in linguistics, corpus studies deal with databases that contain
millions of words. These corpora are then manipulated, drawing on the statistical
techniques developed in the social sciences and mathematics to draw conclusions
about language use. In the mid-1990s, researchers such as Mona Baker, Dorothy
Kenny, and Sarah Laviosa began to apply corpus linguistics to translation studies by
compiling parallel and comparable corpora. They proposed that lexical
simplification, explicitation, and standardization were universals in translation.
(Baker 1995; Kenny 2001; Laviosa 1998)
On a more theoretical level in linguistics, the proposal by Noam Chomsky that the
ability to use language was hard-wired into our brains, and that therefore there must
be a limited set of universal, deep structures that generate all the permutations of
known languages, also fueled the search for universals in both linguistics and in
translation (Chomsky 1965 and 1981). This can probably most clearly be seen in the
continued belief that machine translation was perfectible if linguistic structures could
be properly understood and transformed into what was variously called a universal
deep structure or an intermediary machine language, to and from which all human
languages could be translated.3
3

For representative statements, see Andreev 1967; Zelinsky-Wibbelt 1988; and Hutchins and Somers
1992, especially chapters 5, 6 and 13.

140

�Journal of Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics

Universalism in Translation Studies today?
I would now like to explore a bit more in detail how universalism and historical
particularism intersect, not just in general in the humanities and sciences, but
specifically in translation studies.
First, I think one quite interesting phenomenon is the relative dearth of translation of
translation theory. Given that translation studies should, of all disciplines, be open to
translation, this is a rather paradoxical state of affairs. To take just one example,
China, very little theoretical material is being translated either to or from Chinese and
French, English, or German. From English into Chinese, two alternative strategies
are employed: summaries and descriptions written by Chinese scholars, or the
republication of theoretical texts in China in English. In the other direction, very little
has been done on any level, the exceptions being the historical presentation of
debates regarding translation in Cheung (2006) and Chan (2004). A similar situation
holds for Russian; Russia had and has a large field of translation studies, but almost
none of it is being made available in Western European languages.4 I am sure that
this is true of other languages; to this day, Jiří Levý’s work is known in Western
Europe basically from one paper only (Levý 2000).5 This means that theoretical
models in the field of translation studies are being developed with very little input
from one of the world’s major languages and cultures outside of Europe and North
America.
This in turn poses a danger in translation studies. We risk our theoretical models not
being well understood, or rigorously tested against, the local situation in different
parts of the globe and with different linguistic structures. How, then, can we be
confident about the universal applicability of those theories?

The role of examples and case studies in translation theory
This last point brings me back to the role of examples and case studies in translation
theory. I want to return now to the English translation of Katharina Reiss’s article,
which I mentioned was the impetus for me to start thinking about these matters.
Below are two excerpts from her work:
Unintentional changes may arise from the different language structures as well as
from differences in translating competence

4

Private communication, Sergey Tyulenev.
I would like to thank Zuzana Jettmarová (2009) for drawing my attention to some of Levý’s other
work. See Gile (2009) on this issue in relation to Japanese.
5

141

�“Teaching Translation Theory outside Europe: Historical Specificity Versus Universal Applicability”

Ex. 1: Je suis allée à la gare (French: information about a female
person; no information about the means of travel)
Ich bin zum Bahnhof gegangen (German: no information about
the person; information about the means of travel)
= Linguistically conditioned communicative difference.
Ex. 2: La France est veuve. (Pompidou at the death of de Gaulle)
Frankreich ist Witwe — Frankreich is Witwe geworden —
Frankreich is verwitwet — Frankreich is verwaist [orphaned]
Linguistically conditioned: La France — Witwe [Widow]
“Frankreich” is neuter in German. The image of “widow” is odd
to a person ignorant of French. “Waise” [orphan] is also neuter;
the image of an emotional attachment programmed differently.
(pp. 160-61)
and further down:
Written texts may have single or plural intentions. Plural intentions may be
of the same rank and order. Mostly, however, one intention (and, with it, the
text function) is dominant:
Ex. 3: C vor o und u und a spricht man immer wie ein k; soll es wie ein
c erklingen, lässt man die Cedille springen.
(mnemo-technical rhyme:
Intention 1 — to convey a rule
Intention 2 — to facilitate remembering by giving the text an
artistic form
Intention 3 — to “sweeten” the learning process by giving the
text a pleasing form)
(p. 161-62)
Here in the first example the source language is French and the target language is
German, while in the second example, the example is only in German. In neither case
did the translator provide an English translation.
The vast majority of students in East Asia know neither of these languages (although
a small minority will have learned some of one or the other). Moreover, the point on
which the first example turns, the problem of mismatched gender of nouns in the two
languages, is completely foreign to such students, who may know three or four
languages, none of which feature gendered nouns, and will therefore be completely at
sea. Such students, if they know English, might know mnemo-technical rhymes, such
as “i before e except after c”, but of course cannot make any sense of the German.
Instead of helping the students to understand the points Reiss is trying to make, the
142

�Journal of Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics

examples thus serve only to frustrate the student, making the theory seem alien,
incomprehensible and irrelevant because the example is opaque to her or him.
Another, perhaps more ironic example, is the article by Vermeer concerning skopos
theory. Skopos theory argues that the skopos, or purpose, of the translation is vital in
determining the form that the finished translation should take. The skopos may
derive from a variety of factors, including the commissioner, the translator, and the
audience. Depending upon the skopos, different translations of even the same text
into the same language by the same translator might look radically different from
each other, and possibly also depart sharply from the source text. Yet the translation
into English of Vermeer’s explanation of this theoretical approach to translation is
itself full of examples between German, French, and Spanish, with seemingly no
thought given to how the skopos of translating an article about skopos in translation
might affect the examples used. In other words, if the skopos of the translation is to
make Vermeer’s theoretical model understood by an English reader, how does
leaving the examples in the original languages with no explanation help to fulfill the
skopos of the translation?
What exactly are examples used for anyway in these articles? Reiss, Vermeer, and
other theorists use concrete examples for at least three different purposes. First, to
demonstrate how their theoretical models function in relation to translation of actual
texts. Second, to make the theory more accessible to the readers. Finally, to prove
that the theoretical model is in fact valid by demonstrating that it can be applied to a
real translation. However, when a student either does not know the source or the
target language, then these goals are not being met.
When teaching Reiss’s article in Singapore, I eventually came up with my own
examples for the first example above that made sense to an audience bilingual in
Chinese and English:
She went to buy eggs with her brother.
她跟她的弟弟一起去买鸡蛋。
additional information concerning respective age of siblings
less information about time and number.
请您把书放在桌子。
Please put the books on the desk.
Additional information about number (plural) and object (desk is more
specific than the Chinese term, which could also refer to a table)

143

�“Teaching Translation Theory outside Europe: Historical Specificity Versus Universal Applicability”

Less information about formality of the situation (The Chinese pronoun
is the polite form, similar to the way in which French has vous and
tu)
For the second example, I substituted the English mnemo-technical rhyme “i before e
except after c”.6
When explaining this article to students in class and using these as additional
examples, no one had a problem with it. However, when I later suggested to students
that it would make more sense to substitute these examples for the original ones if
the article were to be translated into Chinese, I encountered strong resistance. To the
students, such substitution was a betrayal of the original.

Taking examples outside of Europe
Vinay and Darbelnet list seven techniques which translators can adopt, ranging from
word-for-word translation to very extreme forms of adaptation. These seven
techniques are illustrated with examples of translation between English and French
for obvious reasons: Vinay and Darbelnet are Canadian, and these are the two official
languages of that country. These techniques, which are developed in relation to two
specific languages with a long history of interaction, are presented as the seven
techniques of translation. In other words, they are presented as a complete and
universal toolkit for any translator, working with any combination of languages.
However, of the seven techniques they list, at least one is not directly applicable to
Chinese. Procedure one, “direct borrowing”, is presented as being a ‘direct’ manner
of using a word from French in English, as the historic theatre (from théâtre) or more
recent borrowings such as déjà vu. This technique, however, actually does not make
much sense in the case of English-Chinese translation because they use different
writing systems. Instead, we need to distinguish between at least two different
techniques.
The first technique is Borrowing while retaining the use of roman alphabet, which
results in a string of roman letters in the middle of a sentence otherwise composed of
Chinese characters: 我不要买Persil, 我要买的是Daz [I don’t want to buy Persil, I
want to buy Daz.] Although this technique was seldom used before the twentieth
century, since at least the Republican Revolution of 1911 there have been periods
when it has been widely practiced, especially by certain authors of the May Fourth
Reiss’s second example is the kind of rule (phonetic) she would like to see for her own work - in other
words, a rule that is simple, hierarchic, and logical.
6

144

�Journal of Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics

Movement in the 1920s and 1930s, and writers such as Yu Dafu (Levan 2007). The
technique continues to be widely used, especially among bilingual speakers, although
it is not in fact simply “direct borrowing”, but rather the creative re-use of English or
other European languages in Chinese. Consider, for example the sentence “你 un不understand?” [do you or do you not understand?] Here a native speaker of Chinese
has used a typical Chinese grammatical pattern of using the first part of a
multisyllabic verb, followed by a marker of negation, and then full verb, to ask a
question. In the process, however, the English word is used in a fashion that would
be incomprehensible to an English speaker.
Transliteration, on the other hand, which Vinay and Darbelnet do not mention, is
the more commonly employed method of ‘borrowing’ a foreign loan word in
Chinese, and involves finding roughly one Chinese character per syllable for a
foreign word. Since the characters are chosen for their sound instead of their
meaning, this results in a string of nonsense words, a bit like the famous
transliteration of Mother Goose Rhymes into French by Luis d’Antin van Rooten as
Mots d'Heures: Gousses, Rames (1980). When transliterating foreign words into
Chinese, there are certain considerations to be kept in mind, especially regarding the
appropriateness of the characters, either in isolation or in combination. For example,
certain characters are avoided; you would not normally use the character “死” [si, to
die], although one notable exception was an early transliteration of AIDS was
“爱死病” [ai-si bing, love-to-death disease]. Also, certain combinations sometimes
may result in unfortunate connotations, so that a company may choose a string of
syllables that does not actually sound very close to the original term rather than get
something such as “口渴口辣” [kouke koula, (makes you) thirsty and your mouth
burn] for Coca Cola, which is instead rendered as “可口可乐” [kekou kele, tasty and
pleasing].7 both of these techniques are also used in various hybrid forms, such as the
commonly used T-血. (T-shirt), where the letter “T” is actually used as the first half
of the word, with a transliteration of ‘shirt’ with the Chinese character “血” which is
pronounced ‘xue’. The example of AIDS given above is similar, with the first two
characters, ai-si, used for the sound of “AIDS”, and the final character, bing, which
means disease, supplied for its meaning. One of the most famous stories of the May
Fourth movement, mentioned above is entitled “阿Q正传” [The Story of Ah Q],
where Chinese character Ah (阿) and the Roman letter “Q” were used together in the
title and throughout the story to refer to the main character, Ah Q.
There are in fact several other hybrid forms possible involving some of the other
techniques Vinay and Darbelnet discuss. Two of the most common are borrowing
and coining, and transliteration and coining. Thus once we begin to consider
languages other than the ones originally used to develop Vinay and Darbelnet’s list,
7

: For more detailed discussions of transliteration, see Ching 1966 and Li 2007.

145

�“Teaching Translation Theory outside Europe: Historical Specificity Versus Universal Applicability”

it becomes apparent that their list is neither exhaustive nor universal. The fact that
English and French use the same writing system disguises a problem which emerges
when we consider Chinese, Russian, Greek, or any other language that does not use
the Roman alphabet. It is only when we look at how their techniques might be
applied in a wide variety of cases that we can test their work’s claim to universalism.
Moreover, once we have considered the Chinese case, and seen how transliteration
results in words that do not actually sound exactly like the original English, we might
wish to return to the examples of French and English, and ponder over why in some
cases the accent marks have been preserved (déjà vu) or erased (theatre). If the
accent marks are erased, is it really direct borrowing? Or what are we to make of
their example of ‘direct borrowing’ into French of redingote, from the English
“riding coat”, where the spelling has been modified? (1958/2000: 85) Even when the
spelling is identical, the pronunciation is often changed; my favourite example is
Goethe Street in Chicago, which is pronounced “go-eethy” by locals.
Another possibility Vinay and Darbelnet do not mention is summary. This may
perhaps be due to their adopting a fairly restricted definition of translation; however,
in the world of professional language manipulation, this technique is widely
practiced. Again to give a Chinese example, I mentioned that it is not common for
European translation theory to be translated into Chinese; however, it is quite
common for such theories to be ‘rewritten’, either in summary or adapted form, such
as Liu Miqing’s 当代翻译理论 [Contemporary Translation Theory (1993)].
Eugene Nida, although in many ways a very ‘old-fashioned’ theoretician, is actually
much better regarding examples than many of his contemporaries, or indeed most
recent theorists. His short essay “Principles of Translation as Exemplified in Bible
Translating” (1959) uses many diverse examples from little-known languages, to
make his case for dynamic equivalence. Moreover, since he cannot assume that his
readers will be conversant with all the languages he cites, he carefully explains the
linguistic context for each. In teaching Nida, I ask students to come up with examples
of the types of things he is discussing in relation to their own language combination.
This often reveals that they have not understood the reading, because they either
cannot come up with an example, or their example is in fact incorrect. After I have
given them several examples, the ideas seem to sink in better. So working through
examples can be effective way of learning theory.

Conclusion
Although universalism has come under attack from various quarters, we should not
lose sight of the fact that, without generalization, we are left with atomistic facts that
146

�Journal of Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics

do not add up to anything. Newton’s law of gravity is still the ‘gold standard’ against
which most theories are measured. The attack by the ‘post’ movements
(postmodernism, postcolonialism, poststructuralism) has been fairly effective in
denying hope that we can achieve that sort of certainty in the human sciences.
Instead, the emergence of computer-based number crunching has seen the emergence
of statistical probability disguised as universalism.
The challenge now is to build inclusive models that take into account the great range
and variety of human linguistic expression and translation practice. Indeed, it would
seem to be antithetical for a theoretical model based on statistics, which depends
upon the concept of representativeness, not to be constructed on the basis of as wide
a range of sample languages as possible.

References
Andreev, N. (1967) “The intermediary language as the focal point of machine
translation” in Machine Translation, edited by A. D. Booth, Amsterdam:
North-Holland Publishing Company, 1-27.
Baker, Mona (1995) ‘Corpora in Translation Studies: An Overview and Some
Suggestions for Future Research’, Target 7(2): 223-243.
Chan, Leo (2004) Twentieth-Century Chinese Translation Theory: Modes, Issues
and Debates, Amsterdam and Philadelphia: John Benjamins Publishing
Company.
Cheung, Martha, editor and annotator (2006) An Anthology of Chinese Discourse
on Translation. Volume 1: From Earliest Times to the Buddhist Project,
Manchester: St. Jerome Press.
Ching, Eugene (1966) “Transliteration or Translation: A Case of Cultural
Borrowing” Chinese Culture: A Quarterly Review 7:2 : 107-116.
Chomsky, Noam (1965) Aspects of the Theory of Syntax, Cambridge, MA: MIT
Press.
Chomsky, Noam (1981) Lectures on Government and Binding, Dordrecht: Foris.
Gasior, Paulina (2009) ‘Translating between Eastern and Western Europe –
postcolonial contexts and parallels’ Paper presented at the 11th Prague
147

�“Teaching Translation Theory outside Europe: Historical Specificity Versus Universal Applicability”

International Conference in Translation and Interpreting Studies: Translating
Beyond East and West. Charles University, Prague 14-16 October.
Giles, Daniel (2009) “East and West: Leveraging Stereoscopic Vision in TS”
Keynote speech, the 11th Prague International Conference in Translation and
Interpreting Studies: Translating Beyond East and West. Charles University,
Prague 14-16 October.
Guha, Ranajit (1983) Elementary Aspects of Peasant Insurgency in Colonial
India. Delhi: Oxford University Press.
Guha, Ranajit (1982a) “Preface” Subaltern Studies 1: vii-viii.
Guha, Ranajit (1982b) “On Some Aspects of the Historiography of Colonial
India” Subaltern Studies 1: 1-8.
Hilgevoord, Jan, Uffink, Jos, "The Uncertainty Principle", The Stanford
Encyclopedia of Philosophy (Fall 2008 Edition), Edward N. Zalta (ed.), URL
=
&lt;http://plato.stanford.edu/archives/fall2008/entries/qt-uncertainty/&gt;.
Accessed 3 Feb 2010.
Hutchins, John W. and Harold L. Somers (1992) An Introduction to Machine
Translation, New York and London: Hartcourt Brace Jovanovich.
Jettmarová, Zuzana (2009) “The Antinomy of the General and the Specific in
Mind, Theory and Translation” Paper presented at the 11th Prague
International Conference in Translation and Interpreting Studies: Translating
Beyond East and West. Charles University, Prague 14-16 October.
Kennedy, Juliette, "Kurt Gödel", The Stanford Encyclopedia of Philosophy
(Winter
2008
Edition),
Edward
N.
Zalta
(ed.),
URL
=
&lt;http://plato.stanford.edu/archives/win2008/entries/goedel/&gt;. Accessed 3 Feb
2010.
Kenny, Dorothy (2001) Lexis and Creativity in Translation: A Corpus-based
Study, Manchester: St. Jerome.
Kuhn, Thomas S. (1962) The Structure of Scientific Revolutions, Chicago:
University of Chicago Press.
Latour, Bruno and Steven Woolgar (1986) Laboratory Life: The Construction of
Scientific Facts. 2d ed. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.
148

�Journal of Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics

Laviosa, Sara (1998) “The English Comparable Corpus: A Resource and a
Methodology”, in Lynne Bowker, Michael Cronin, Dorothy Kenny &amp;
Jennifer Pearson (eds) Unity in Diversity: Current Trends in Translation
Studies, Manchester: St. Jerome Publishing, 101-112.
Levan, Valerie M. (2007) “Incorporating the Foreign: Translation in Yu Dafu’s
Sinking” in Collected Essays from Translation: East Asian and the West, An
International Conference for Junior Scholars, Taipei: Graduate Institute of
Translation and Interpretation, National Taiwan Normal University, 203-220.
Levý, Jiří (2000) “Translation as a Decision Process” in The Translation Studies
Reader, ed. Lawrence Venuti, 1st. ed. London: Routledge, 148-159.
Li, Chris Wen-Chao (2007) “Foreign Names into Native Tongues: How to
transfer sound between languages—transliteration, phonological translation,
nativization, and implications for translation theory” Target 19.1: 45-68.
Liu, Miqing 刘宓庆 (1993) 当代翻译理论[Contemporary Translation Theory],
Taipei: Bookman Books.
Longino, Helen (1990) Science as Social Knowledge: Values and Objectivity in
Scientific Inquiry. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.
Longino, Helen, "The Social Dimensions of Scientific Knowledge", The Stanford
Encyclopedia of Philosophy (Fall 2008 Edition), Edward N. Zalta (ed.), URL
=
&lt;http://plato.stanford.edu/archives/fall2008/entries/scientific-knowledgesocial/&gt;.
Miller, J. Hillis (1996) “Border Crossings, Translating Theory: Ruth” in Sanford
Budick and Wolfgang Iser, eds, The Translatability of Cultures, Stanford U.
Press, 1996, 207-223.
Nida, Eugene (1959) “Principles of Translation as Exemplified in Bible
Translating” in On Translation, edited by Reuben Brower, Cambridge, MA:
Harvard Universiyt Press, 11-31.
Reiss, Katharina (1971/2000) “Type, Kind and Individuality of Text: Decision
making in translation”, translated by Susan Kitron, , in The Translation
Studies Reader, edited by Lawrence Venuti, London: Routledge, 160-71.
Robinson, Douglas (1997) Translation and Empire: Postcolonial Theories
Explained, Manchester: St. Jerome Press.
149

�“Teaching Translation Theory outside Europe: Historical Specificity Versus Universal Applicability”

Rooten, Luis d’Antin van (1980) Mots d'Heures: Gousses, Rames, London :
Penguin.
Shalizi, Cosma Rohilla (2009) “Gödel’s Theorem” in his Notebooks
http://cscs.umich.edu/~crshalizi/notebooks/godels-theorem.html. Accessed 3 Feb
2010.
Sokal, Alan and Jean Bricmont (1999) Fashionable Nonsense: Postmodern I
ntellectuals' Abuse of Science, New York: Picador.
Stigler, Stephen M (1986) The History of Statistics: The Measurement of
Uncertainty before 1900, Cambridge, MA, and London: Belkap Press of
Harvard University Press.
Stigler, Stephen M (2000) Statistics on the Table: The History of Statistical
Concepts and Methods, Cambridge, MA, and London: Harvard University
Press.
Uebel, Thomas, "Vienna Circle", The Stanford Encyclopedia of Philosophy (Fall
2008
Edition),
Edward
N.
Zalta
(ed.),
URL
=
&lt;http://plato.stanford.edu/archives/fall2008/entries/vienna-circle/&gt;.
Accessed
3 Feb 2010.
Vermeer, Hans (1989/2000) “Skopos and Commission in Translational Action”,
translated by Andrew Chesterman, , in The Translation Studies Reader,
edited by Lawrence Venuti, London: Routledge, 221-32.
Vinay, Jean-Paul and Jean Darbelnet (1958/2000) “A Methodology for
Translation”, translated by Juan C. Sager and M.-J. Hamel, in The Translation
Studies Reader, edited by Lawrence Venuti, London: Routledge, 84-93.
White, Hayden (1973) Metahistory: The Historical Imagination in NineteenthCentury Europe. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press.
Zelinsky-Wibbelt, Cornelia (1988) “The transfer of quantifiers in a multilingual
machine translation system” in From Syntax to Semantics: Insights from
Machine Translation, edited by E. H. Steiner, P. Schmidt and C. ZelinskyWibbelt, London: Pinter Publishers, 187-215.

150

�</text>
                  </elementText>
                </elementTextContainer>
              </element>
            </elementContainer>
          </elementSet>
        </elementSetContainer>
      </file>
    </fileContainer>
    <elementSetContainer>
      <elementSet elementSetId="1">
        <name>Dublin Core</name>
        <description>The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.</description>
        <elementContainer>
          <element elementId="79">
            <name>Extent</name>
            <description>The size or duration of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3724">
                <text>2790</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="50">
            <name>Title</name>
            <description>A name given to the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3725">
                <text>Teaching Translation Theory outside Europe: Historical Specificity Versus Universal Applicability</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="96">
            <name>Author</name>
            <description>Author</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3726">
                <text>St. André, James</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="94">
            <name>Abstract</name>
            <description>A summary of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3727">
                <text>While teaching first in Singapore and now in Manchester, it has come to my attention that there are certain difficulties in teaching translation theory either outside of Europe or, in Europe, to students from outside of Europe who come here to study. This paper concentrates on the role of examples in theoretical works, the problems they pose in teaching theory and the implications for universalism in translation studies. I draw on Edward Said’s discussion of travelling theory, post-colonial critiques of the hegemonic role of English, and skopos theory to propose two courses of action to help overcome the problem: first, the incorporation of the translation of theoretical material both from and into European languages as part of practical postgraduate training; and second, the use of a radical substitution policy for examples, with new examples centred around the target language, rather than preservation of the original examples, which are centred around the source-language. Using the example of China, I will demonstrate how these two strategies push us to reconsider how we approach teaching theory. Firstly, the translation of Chinese theoretical texts into English will allow for a deeper appreciation of writings in Chinese and their wider dissemination. Secondly, the search for examples which involve the target language should lead to an engagement between the target culture and the theory. Translating Vinay and Darbelnet’s path breaking essay on translation processes, for example, immediately raises the question of what exactly is meant by ‘borrowing’ in the Chinese context, and for the need to distinguish between retaining the use of the roman alphabet and transliteration using Chinese characters, a distinction that would never arise between French, English and German.    Keywords: translation theory, examples, Chinese</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="45">
            <name>Publisher</name>
            <description>An entity responsible for making the resource available</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3728">
                <text>International Burch University</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="40">
            <name>Date</name>
            <description>A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3729">
                <text>2015</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="97">
            <name>Keywords</name>
            <description>Keywords.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3730">
                <text>Article
PeerReviewed</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
        </elementContainer>
      </elementSet>
    </elementSetContainer>
    <tagContainer>
      <tag tagId="26">
        <name>L Education (General),P Philology. Linguistics</name>
      </tag>
    </tagContainer>
  </item>
  <item itemId="486" public="1" featured="0">
    <fileContainer>
      <file fileId="509">
        <src>https://omeka.ibu.edu.ba/files/original/d380f0c482d70d82167a67d1617e7bce.pdf</src>
        <authentication>cac035bdbed0599832d9fc052c5bc3d2</authentication>
        <elementSetContainer>
          <elementSet elementSetId="4">
            <name>PDF Text</name>
            <description/>
            <elementContainer>
              <element elementId="52">
                <name>Text</name>
                <description/>
                <elementTextContainer>
                  <elementText elementTextId="3739">
                    <text>LITERARINESS AS FREEDOM OF THINKING

Lindita Tahiri
University of Prishtina, Kosova1
Article History:
Submitted:10.06.2015
Accepted:10.08.2015

Abstract: The study argues about the advantage of the linguistic approach to literature in
enabling students become aware of the multiple perspectives of narration giving them the power
to do the work that otherwise the supreme interpreter would have done for them, thus sharpening
their critical thinking skills. Contemporary novels in Albanian will be examined, by renowned
writers such as Ismail Kadare and Ben Blushi. Kadare, probably the most famous Albanian
writer ever, will be argued as an example of the author who kept the free thinking alive during
the period of extreme totalitarian regime where the language was saturated with communist
manipulative rhetoric, and his literature achieved this specifically with impersonal techniques of
narration. These texts will be analyzed by pointing out the main linguistic indicators of interior
monologue (Cohn), such as features of agency, transitivity, passivization, nominalization, deictic
expressions, and free indirect speech. Examples from popular fiction will be discussed, taking
into account the negative connotations about popular fiction as a kind of literature associated
with industry and entertainment, as opposed to literary fiction which is studied at the academia.
Popular fiction will be explored from the perspective of provoking public discussion about
important societal issues, such as is the case with the Albanian author Blushi who aroused heated
debate and was accused by the Muslim community for ruining the religious harmony of
Albanians. This debate will be compared with the initiative to review Kosovar history textbooks
due to their negative portrayal of Turkey. As conclusion, the study aims to demonstrate that
perspectival narration may be used as teaching strategy to help readers explore the other’s self
and develop freedom of thinking.
Keywords: pedagogical stylistics, Kadare, critical thinking, literariness

“Kosova" is the Albanian name and "Kosovo" is the Serbian name for the country, which institutionally calls itself the
Republic of Kosova. The Serbian government does not recognize the state calling it Kosovo. Many international speakers use
"Kosovo" without implying that they believe that Kosovo is Serbian. The deliberate choice in this paper is the Albanian form of
the lexeme.
1

�1. INTRODUCTION
Whereas early stylistics of the 60s stressed the autonomy of literature with attention on
stylistically marked texts, regarding study of literature as a branch of aesthetics (Widdowson:
1996), modern stylistics views language of literature in relation to other discourses in terms of
continuum rather than polarity. This perspective integrates the linguistic and literary study and
develops the awareness of literature as language, which is beneficial both to teaching of language
and teaching of literature. The focus of stylistics in the text of literature, rather than in vague and
impressionistic judgments, makes it a useful pedagogical tool in language and literature studies
(Weber: 1996).
Stylistics has pedagogical usefulness because it of its basic principles such as being rigorous,
retrievable, and replicable (Simpson: 2004). The teacher does not only interpret messages of the
literary work, but analyzes textual features, such as lexicon and syntax, depicting their function
towards producing the literariness of a text. This strategy of interpretation based on linguistic
analysis avoids for the morally prescriptive language and allows for the plurality of interpretation
and readings for the contemporary reader/student, who lives within the uncertainty of the modern
age, where everything is opened to redefinition.
According to the literary critic Jesse Matz (2004) one of the important developments of the
modern novel is the replacement of a belief in absolute, knowable truth with a sense of relative,
provisional truths, with the awareness of ‘reality’ as a constructed fiction. Modern writers do not
aim to give a full or neutral version of a story, but they emphasize the limited perspective of the
personal point of view. As Matz puts it: “…we have to do the work an omniscient narrator would
otherwise have done for us, and the participation gives objective knowledge the feel of
subjective involvement” (52). Therefore, the perspectival narration appears as an aesthetic
strategy of individuality which helps readers grasp the idea of the content of subjectivity in the
midst of the information chaos.
The teaching strategy based on pedagogical stylistics not only makes literature more
approachable for students but also contributes for the development of critical thinking, which is
commonly listed amongst the main skills belonging to generic competencies – transferable,
multifunctional knowledge, skills and attitudes that people could learn and develop in different
ways and learning environments, and apply across a variety of job and life contexts (European
Commission, DG Education and Culture, 2006,2012). Generic skills have been capturing
growing attention all over the world by education policy makers, and therefore particular
attention should be paid to the way literature is taught, as a tool to sharpen the most important
competences of the modern citizens.
1.1.Literature as public space for dialogue: Albanian case
The Albanian case might not be different from other former communist countries, where a great
moral and ideological power was attributed to literature, even to poetry, which although usually

�is the elite genre, in these countries enjoyed immense popularity. This trend may be illustrated
with one of the Albanian internationally recognized authors of literary fiction, Ismail Kadare,
who is a bestseller amongst Albanian readers of all ages. His work kept the free thinking alive
during the period of extreme totalitarian regime where the language was saturated with
communist manipulative rhetoric. It was his work that refilled with life the drained language of
mechanical thought, and it was his language that broke through the walls where the dictatorship
could not make the way into. By keeping language creativity alive, Kadare succeeded to give
self-dignity to the intimate language of individuals, as readers could find more life in his works
than in everyday reality. With the words of the American scholar Peter Morgan (2006:9), “As the
voice of an alternative, better Albania, Kadare offered to his countrymen one of the few sources
of hope for change”.
According to statistics, literary fiction in Albania still sells well and one may argue that literature
amongst Albanian culture is not perceived as privilege of academia. Historically Albanian
writers have been identified with the national aspirations and the ‘book’ has been considered as
the best means to resist occupation and totalitarianism. The ‘death of the author’ is practically
impossible within Albanian culture, in spite the effort of Barthes to liberate the reader from the
tyranny of the limited interpretation. The Albanian author is very much alive: he has often been a
public figure, and even a hero defending the national cause.
Is there still need for a mission similar to Kadare’s work, a need to make readers critical towards
ideological manipulations of public discourse, in the world of today, in the age of globalization
and uncertainty, in the age of democracy as well as of massacres and anxiety? Many works of
popular fiction, as ‘Da Vinci Code’ does with religion for example, explore important issues for
society and tend to provoke public discussion about problems that preoccupy humankind, and
this seems to be the feature that the modern consumer of books wants to find into the reading
process- the public space for dialogue, evocative to the possibility for interaction that internet
provides for its users. We propose that this need may be efficiently explored by the teacher of
literature, who in this fashion encourages and inspires the critical and creative thinking as one of
the most essential competences for the modern individual.
This skill of critical thinking is crucial within the debates about history textbooks which are
taking place in Balkans, and the literature teacher can help students became aware of the
editorial, selective, interpretative roles of the historian, as well as of the author of fiction. For
instance, in 2011 the Minister of External Affairs in Turkey asked the Kosovar authorities to
change history textbooks, because they are “Albanian- centered and portray a negative image of
Turkey” (Jazexhi: 2013). What kind of skills do students need in order to maintain the neutral
attitude towards ideological maneuvering of any kind?
2. METHOD
Contemporary Albanian literature is analyzed from the aspect of linguistic presentation of
character’s ‘mind style ’(Roger Fowler: 1977) pointing out the pedagogical advantage of

�linguistic criticism. History textbooks are also analyzed from the point of view of linguistic
criticism. Linguistic structures present in the respective texts will be approached as expression of
social values, based on the functional model developed by M.A.K. Halliday (1973, 1978, 1994 )
and adopted by Roger Fowler (1979, 1991,2003), Hodge, Kress and Trew (1979), referred to as
Systemic Functional Linguistics. Fundamental to these models is the belief that the uses of
language shape the linguistic system.
The language function which will be of primary focus is the interpersonal function , as both
interactional and personal, as means whereby social groups are integrated and the individual is
identified and reinforced. The indicators for this function, according to Halliday are: lexical
register, types of speech and modality, use of person, of modifiers and intensifiers, and in
particular comments and evaluative expressions.
Critical Discourse Analysis (CDA) will be used and the concept of van Dijk (1998) about the
rhetoric of polarization will be applied. One of the typical analyses that van Dijk does of the
media discourse is the polarized representation of the self and the other, which serves the
definition of the social identity of the social group, whose interests are represented in respective
discourse. As van Dijk claims, regardless of whether they are aware and knowledgeable about an
ideology, this ideology underlies language and exists, the way grammar exists.
Finally, the vigorous discussion set off by the literary theorist Eagelton (1985) about language
conventionally perceived as literature, will be taken into account. Nowadays the study of
literature, similarly to the study of modern linguistics, is not positioning itself as normative
science prescribing one single correct language variant. Rather than aiming to define a transhistorical essence of literature and originality which is hard to clarify, literature scholars are
more and more talking about literariness as a potential of all language which may be present in
different kinds of discourse .Furthermore, this potential for creativity in language is considered
as closely linked to the basic cognitive processes in language usage and language origin (Lakoff
and Turner:1989)

3. RESULTS
3.1. Kadare: the split identity
One of Kadare’s rare novels translated in English from the original is the Broken April, whose
main character is Gjorg, the young mountaineer, who kills a man to avenge the death of his
brother according to the provisions of the ancient Code. The novel starts with the thematic
positioning of the possessive third person pronoun (His feet were cold), and throughout the text
this kind of usage of the pronoun serves the narrative voice to keeps a distance and to give the
impression of showing rather than telling, in particular when internal thoughts and perceptions
of the character are transmitted. The thematic positioning of intensifiers, either as adjectives,
adverbs, subordinate connectors or deictics, serves as an orientation towards the interior world of
the character. Even the syntactic order of clauses follows the chronological experience of the

�character and orients the reading process creating an impression of straightforwardness and
symbolism. The author uses free direct speech and partially free indirect speech in the
psychonarration (Cohn: 1978) of the character, suggesting not only his thoughts but also
emotional extra-linguistics processes directly transmitted by the narrator.
The literature teachers can draw out these points, focusing on all levels of language, e.g. on the
lexical choice which is typical for the character and suggests interior perception with character’s
focalization. They can point out the foregrounded transitivity, as typically Gjorg takes verbs
denoting factual actions, but without effect on the objects. His verbs denoting physical actions
refer to body movements and are self-referential. Verbs depicting his main activity (wait, shoot)
are accompanied by modals (had to, must) adding connotations of obligation and involuntary
actions. So his verbs show mainly lack of ability to act rather than real actions, which make him
a victim more than an actor.
The English translation points out the lack of action and will, as is the case in this example, by
switching the agency to the object compared to the original Albanian where the agency falls on
the character: “Slowly the gun barrel swept over some patches” (7). The translation succeeds to
transmit the split identity, the dilemma to proceed with the action of avenge which is imposed
due to social norms , and for instance students can be lead to interpret this as an ever existing
dilemma of the modern individual. What is significant, students learn to be sensitive to
grammatical indicators used to reinforce specific meanings in all kinds of discourses.

3.2. History through lenses of fiction
Regarding accuses for nationalism in Kosova history books2, the teacher can provide a textual
analysis and explain for instance that when non-factive verbs (Hudelston: 2002)are used such as:
“It is thought by the scholars that Albanian language descends directly Illyrian” (History 6:24 ),
this creates an impression of doubt about our predecessors rather than nationalism. Or, sentences
like “Special feature of the influence and legacy of the Ottoman culture here are the various
facilities built during that time” (History 7:130) show multiculturalism rather than hatred towards
the ottoman culture, avoiding rhetoric of opposition of evil and righteous.
Another case of telling history through fiction, Ben Blushi’s Living in an island has provoked
profuse debates within the public opinion, accused by the Muslim community for endangering
the religious harmony and tolerance of Albanians. The novel portrays the life of an Albanian
family embracing simultaneously two religions, as historical allegory pointing to the challenging
subject of the religious background of Albanians. The teacher can approach literature as
historical construction, where historical characters have been explored in a different light by the
author, amongst them Skanderbeg, the most prominent figure in the history of Albanians, famous
for his resistance against the Ottoman Empire: “Skanderbeg fought for power and not for faith “,
says Komneni, renown historical figure and one of the main characters in the novel. “The book
2

Translations from history texts and Blushi’s novel are done by the author of the paper .

�belongs to the knowledgeable, who are usually the most powerful” declares Isaac to Sara in the
closing chapter. “When Turks leave, we will write again the book we have lost.”
The teacher may empower the readers by asking them whose word is it, and should the
character’s words be taken as presentation of character’s ‘mind style’ or as author’s own
judgment and distinct message ?(Wimsatt and Breadsly: 1947). The teacher can point out to the
intrusive presence of the author, as in the case when the former Christian entered the mosque and
“ he understood that he demonstrated logical superiority even at the very first Islam lesson”.
By applying pedagogical stylistics students learn to make difference between impersonal and
neutral narrative voices and the intrusive and judgmental ever-knowing story-tellers.

CONCLUSION
The teaching strategy based on pedagogical stylistics not only makes literature more
approachable for students in this age when reading is globally declining, but also contributes for
the development of critical thinking, which is commonly listed amongst the main generic skills
the modern individual needs in developing life- long learning. Furthermore, the focus on interior
monologue technique with the neutral presentation of the internal life of people is of social and
political importance, because it is a concrete tool of arousing tolerance and understanding
between people (Aurebach, 1968:552). As a result, students learn to enjoy a non-visible, nonintrusive source of narration, rather than a judgmental and evaluative privileged source of
information, and this way they are more resistant to authoritarian discourse

�References
Aurebach, Eric.(1968) Mimesis: The representation of Reality in Western Literature. NY:
Princeton University Press.
Bicaj, Isa and Salihu, Arbër (2012) Historia 7, Prishtinë: Libri Shkollor
Blushi, Ben. (2008) Të jetosh në ishull. Tiranë: Toena
Cohn, Dorrit. (1978) Transparent Minds Princeton University Press
Demaj, Frashër and Rexhepi, Fehmi (2010) Historia 6, Prishtinë: Libri Shkollor
Eagelton, Terry. (1985) Literary Theory, Basic Blackwell
Fowler, Roger (1981) Literature as Social Discourse.UK: Batsford Academic and Educational
Ltd.
Fowler, R., Hodge, B. , Kress, G. and Trew, T. (1979) Language and Control Routledge
&amp;Kegan Paul.
Gelder, Ken. (2004) Popular Fiction, The logics and practices of a literary field. NY:
Routldedge.
Halliday, M. A. K.( 1973) Explorations in the Functions of Language. London: Edward Arnold.
Huddleston, Rodney and K.Pullum, Geoffrey (2002) The Cambridge Grammar of the English
Language. Cambridge University Press
Jazexhi, Olsi (2013)Rrëfimet e një kombi. Tiranë: Free Media Institute
Kadare, Ismail (1980) Prilli i Thyer, Tiranë
Kadare, Ismail.(1990) Broken April. Translated by J.Hodgson. NY:New Amsterdam books.
Lakoff , George and Turner, Mark.( 1989) More than Cool Reason. Chicago:University of
Chicago Press.
Matz, Jesse (2004) the modern novel. UK: Blackwell.
Morgan, Peter (2006) Modern Homer or Albanian Dissident, World Literature Today: A
Literary Quarterly of the University of Oklahoma, 2006 Sept-Oct; 80 (5): 7-11
Simpson, Paul (2004) Stylistics NY: Routledge
Weber, Jean Jacque. 1996 ., in “The Stylistic Reader”, ed. J.J. Weber, University Centre
Luxemburg
Widdowson, H.G. 1996 .“Stylistics: an approach to stylistic analysis”, in “The Stylistic Reader”,
ed. Jean Jacques Weber, University Centre Luxemburg,
Wimsatt, William K. and Monroe C. Beardsley. "The Intentional Fallacy." Sewanee Review, vol.
54 (1946): 468-488.
Education and Training 2020 Work programme Thematic Working Group 'Assessment of Key
Competences' Literature review, Glossary and examples November (2012) in:
http://ec.europa.eu/education/policy/school/doc/keyreview_en.pdf

�</text>
                  </elementText>
                </elementTextContainer>
              </element>
            </elementContainer>
          </elementSet>
        </elementSetContainer>
      </file>
    </fileContainer>
    <elementSetContainer>
      <elementSet elementSetId="1">
        <name>Dublin Core</name>
        <description>The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.</description>
        <elementContainer>
          <element elementId="79">
            <name>Extent</name>
            <description>The size or duration of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3732">
                <text>2956</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="50">
            <name>Title</name>
            <description>A name given to the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3733">
                <text>LITERARINESS AS FREEDOM OF THINKING</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="96">
            <name>Author</name>
            <description>Author</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3734">
                <text>Tahiri, Lindita</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="94">
            <name>Abstract</name>
            <description>A summary of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3735">
                <text>The study argues about the advantage of the linguistic approach to literature in enabling students become aware of the multiple perspectives of narration giving them the power to do the work that otherwise the supreme interpreter would have done for them, thus sharpening their critical thinking skills. Contemporary novels in Albanian will be examined, by renowned writers such as Ismail Kadare and Ben Blushi. Kadare, probably the most famous Albanian writer ever, will be argued as an example of the author who kept the free thinking alive during the period of extreme totalitarian regime where the language was saturated with communist manipulative rhetoric, and his literature achieved this specifically with impersonal techniques of narration. These texts will be analyzed by pointing out the main linguistic indicators of interior monologue (Cohn), such as features of agency, transitivity, passivization, nominalization, deictic expressions, and free indirect speech.  Examples from popular fiction will be discussed, taking into account the negative connotations about popular fiction as a kind of literature associated with industry and entertainment, as opposed to literary fiction which is studied at the academia. Popular fiction will be explored from the perspective of provoking public discussion about important societal issues, such as is the case with the Albanian author Blushi who aroused heated debate and was accused by the Muslim community for ruining the religious harmony of Albanians. This debate will be compared with the initiative to review Kosovar history textbooks due to their negative portrayal of Turkey. As  conclusion, the study aims to demonstrate that  perspectival narration may be used as  teaching strategy to help readers explore the other’s self and  develop freedom of thinking.</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="45">
            <name>Publisher</name>
            <description>An entity responsible for making the resource available</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3736">
                <text>International Burch University</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="40">
            <name>Date</name>
            <description>A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3737">
                <text>2015</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="97">
            <name>Keywords</name>
            <description>Keywords.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3738">
                <text>Article
PeerReviewed</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
        </elementContainer>
      </elementSet>
    </elementSetContainer>
    <tagContainer>
      <tag tagId="69">
        <name>L Education (General),P Philology. Linguistics,PN Literature (General)</name>
      </tag>
    </tagContainer>
  </item>
  <item itemId="487" public="1" featured="0">
    <fileContainer>
      <file fileId="510">
        <src>https://omeka.ibu.edu.ba/files/original/ecbd24d715cbff5716d5ab9199b0f89e.pdf</src>
        <authentication>9948f1f7579dbd9dfff372c5b42ea96c</authentication>
        <elementSetContainer>
          <elementSet elementSetId="4">
            <name>PDF Text</name>
            <description/>
            <elementContainer>
              <element elementId="52">
                <name>Text</name>
                <description/>
                <elementTextContainer>
                  <elementText elementTextId="3746">
                    <text>Journal of Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics

Evaluating ESL Students’ Creativity in Writing
Arta Toci
South East European University, Macedonia
Submitted: 15.04.2014.
Accepted: 19.11.2014.

Abstract
Writing as a productive skill isan integral part of the language-learning process.
However, students do not consider writing an easy skill to learn and many ESL
teachers certainly consider it a difficult skill to teach.Creative writing normally refers
to the production of texts that have an aesthetic rather than a purely informative,
instrumental or pragmatic purpose. Creative writing in ESL classes has started
developing lately, but only to be incorporated as a supportive skill in teaching
writing.Responding to students’ writing is an important issue to discuss when
considering teaching creative writing. Response is a process that includes peer
review, peer editing and continuous feedback through the stages of creative writing.
By providing constructive feedback, the teacherunderstandsa writer’s problems and
intentions by making students responsible for finding and analyzing what needs to be
improved.
Key words: teaching, writing, creativity, feedback, assessment

Introduction
Writing as a productive skill is an integral partof the language-learning
process.However, students do not consider writing an easy skill to learn and many
ESL teachers certainly consider it a difficult skill to teach.According to Reid (1993),
many ESL teachers only used writing as a skill to support language learning. This
assumption led them to think that writing could be useful as a technique for adding
interest or as a testing device for assessing grammar errors. Nowadays, writing has
become an important communicative skill as a result of researchin this field. ESL
teachers have come to recognize writing as a skill that is equal to other integral
language-learning skills and many of them have investigated different approaches to
writing.

The importance of writing in EFL classes
31

�Evaluating ESL Students’ Creativity in Writing

Like speaking, writing is a key to academic language success.From an early age,
students acquire second languagesthrough words, and thencontinuing with sentences,
paragraphs and longer papers.They encounter difficulties because most students find
it hard to express ideas even though they have basic language knowledge. When
taking on a writing assignment, students have little confidence, which leads to
different preconceptions and stereotypes about writing. This problem has been a
topic for discussion among many language teachers and researchers due to the great
importance of writing in language learning. “Each time I am assigned a paper I stuck
in my breathas if I had to move a hundred-pound stone from the entrance to my
apartment in order to go on living” (Bishop, W., 1990, p.26).Anxiety makes students
reluctant to engage themselves in the writing process. The fear of not doing
everything right makes them step back and teachers miss out on what students really
know. If students are free to express themselves, teachers will be able to see what
they know and what they need to learn in order to improve.
There are many contradictory opinions on whether controlled instruction should be
the prevalent method for teaching writing or ifcreative writing techniques should take
over. A group of researchers would prefer to use them interchangeably even though
they might prefer one to the other. Having looked at different researchers’ views in
this area of study, we teachers can decide to choose which instruction methodis the
most useful and fruitful in teaching writing. It is crucial to bear in mind what writing
really is and how we can enhance learning through the instruction of writing. “The
view of writing as a tool for learning and not just a means to demonstrate learning is
one of the major contributions of the research into the writing process” (Elbow,
1998). Therefore, if students are given the opportunity to use the target language in
order to build their capacities to write, they will surely acquire the language at the
same time.

Defining creativity in writing
The traditional approaches to writing have had a great impact on both teachers’ and
students’ beliefs about how to teach and learn writing. Despite the fact that many
researchers have reported positive results from usingcreative writing techniques,
many teachers have been reluctant to adoptthis method in the classroom. It must be
noted that creative writing existed in theory long before it started to be used in
practice. Considering that creative writing differs in many ways from traditional
methods of teaching writing, it has been considered a challenge and an unfamiliar
method that does not take into account important elements such as accuracy and
precision.

32

�Journal of Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics

The movement from controlled to free or guided writing started in the early 1980s
when teachers decided to embrace this new methodology (Reid, 1993).Creative
writingas a writing methodology is characterized by the free expression of thoughts
and ideas in a supportive and constructive classroom environment. It is also referred
to as expressive or creative writing. This approach focuses on enhancing students’
ability to express their creativity and to genuinely practice writing in an anxiety-free
atmosphere. Techniques that demonstrate the above-mentioned characteristics of
creative writing include: writing a paragraph by describing a person or a place;
writing a short story; writing an informal letter to a friend or a report about
something you have read; writing about a given topic; and writing by describing a
picture. Moreover, there have also been discussions about creative writingas a way of
boosting critical thinking. Major (1994) has argued that creative writing activities
actually improve critical thinking since they are based on students’ personal and
emotional state, which gives them a sense of motivation. Elbow (1998) also supports
the use of creative writing by giving arguments for its general application and even
recommending it for freshman writing courses, saying that students “need to practice
nonacademic writing”.

Evaluating creativity in writing
“Feedback has long been regarded as essential for the development of second
language (L2) writing skills, both for its potential for learning and for student
motivation.”(Hyland, K. &amp; Hyland, F., 2006, p.83). Giving the wrong feedback may
discourage students’ progress in creativity and decrease their creativity. Responding
to students’ writingshould be seen as a process in itself and proper attention should
be given to its importance in their language-learning progress. In most cases, a piece
of writing is analyzed as a final product and the main focus is on error correction.
However, language teachers face a permanent question: Does error correction
always help to improve students’ writing in L2? “One line of argument, influenced
by process theories, claims that feedback on error to L2 students is discouraging and
generally fails to produce any improvements in their subsequent writing.”(Hyland, K.
&amp; Hyland, F., 2006, p.84). However, a considerable number of researchers claim the
opposite.
Feedback is considered a much more difficultapproach to evaluating creative
writing.This is because an idea that one person considers creative may not be seen as
such by another person. Another problem in measuring creativity is avoiding
subjectivity and choosing the right criteria. “Self-report measures of creativity and
global assessments of students’ creativity by others (such as teachers) have also
failed to demonstrate sufficient validity to be trusted for most uses.” (Baer, J. &amp; Mc
Kool, Sh., 2009, p.2)
33

�Evaluating ESL Students’ Creativity in Writing

Giving feedback on creative writing is thought to be very difficult since not everyone
rates creativity in the same way. In addition, it is human nature to render judgments
based on feelings, and a work that changespeople’s feelings is considered
worthier.To better illustrate this idea, Kaufman, Christopher &amp; Kaufman, (2008)
claim:
It may be the case, then, that we make judgments of a set of work based
upon the pieces that made us ‘feel’ the most. If we attach an emotion to a
piece of poetry, then we should be able to remember that piece better
and, further, to use it as an anchor for our judgments of other works by
that artist. (p. 3).
What to focus on when giving feedback on creative writing? Thisis the hardest part
for language teachers. Creative writing positively affects language expression
through writing, which leads to a better general performance in that language.
Students need to have access to this writing approach, which seeks to be aesthetic
and at the same time offers relaxation for both the reader and writer. Whether
approached in a traditional way or in a contemporary one, the teachers’ main aim
should be to help their students progress in their language learning. With a lot of
care, they should offer feedback so that students can see their strengths and errors
and continue striving for optimal performance.

The research
This study was conducted among 25third-year students at the English department at
South East European University in Tetovo. Participantswere givenassignments such
as writing a letter, writing a short story, writing by using pictures, etc. All of the inclass activities mentioned above were used according to creative writing techniques
and no error correction was provided. The teacher’s role during the course of these
activities was to be an observer, a supporter and a guide or a prompter. Students
received more peer feedback rather than teacher feedback during the in-class
activities. As a result of their group and peer work, students were giving comments to
each other related to the structure of ideas and the choice of vocabulary. Students
received feedback from the teacher after they read what they had written. The teacher
feedback included appraisal for the good and strong points of the writing task and
suggestions for improvement on the weaker points. It did not include error correction
or correction related to mechanics. The students were evaluated ontheir progress in
the following categories: Introduction, support, organization, vocabulary and
sentence structure, and grammar and spelling.

34

�Journal of Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics

Students’ assignments were collected every week. After each class the students
received feedback from the teacherbased upon the following criteria:
Table 1. Evaluation criteria adopted from ‘The HOT Writing Rubric’ developed by
Project Zero at Harvard University and by the Composition Program at the
University of California, Irvine.
Criteria

5

4

3

2

1

0

Creative
Writing

Excellent use
of
imagery;
similes; vivid,
detailed
descriptions;
figurative
language;
puns;
wordplay;
metaphor;
irony.
Surprises the
reader
with
unusual
associations,
breaks
conventions,
and
thwarts
expectations.

Some startling
images, a few
stunning
associative
leaps with a
weak
conclusion or
lesser, more
ordinary
images
and
comparisons.
Inconsistent.

Sentimental,
predictable, or
cliché.

Borrows
ideas
or
images from
popular
culture in an
unreflective
way.

Cursory
response.
Obvious lack of
motivation
and/or
poor
understanding of
the assignment.

No
response.

All three drafts submitted by the students were analyzed according to the analytic
scale in order to tracktheir progress through the workshop. Detailed results from
drafts are shown in Figure 1. The following figures will show students’ progress
throughout the drafts in five categories as separate units and throughout drafts as
whole essays.

35

�Evaluating ESL Students’ Creativity in Writing

Chart 1: Draft results for all five categories
10
9
8

grading scale

7
6
5

Draft 1
Draft 2

4

Draft 3

3
2
1
0

Vocabulary
Organization and sentence
structure

Grammar
and spelling

Introduction

Support

Draft 1

3.12

3.92

3.2

3.84

4.48

Draft 2

5.36

6.08

5.68

5.76

6.48

Draft 3

6.32

6.56

6.8

7.28

7.84

As shown in Figure 1, students’ introductions scored an average of 3.12 inthe first
draft. In the second draft, the average score improved to 5.36. Students showed
additional progress in the third draft, with the average score rising to 6.32. In other
words, the writers made significant progress between their first and second drafts,
with the average score improving by 2.24, whereas the improvement between the
second and third drafts was slighter at about 0.96. The overall average increase from
the first to the thirddraft was 3.2.
In the category of support, students’ performance in writing the first draft was
evaluated at an average of 3.92 out of 10. Students’ ability to support their essays
improved significantlyby the second draft, where they scored an average of 6.08.
However, their progress slowed between the second and third drafts, where the
average score was 6.56. In other words, the average score rose 2.16 points between
the first and second drafts, while the improvementbetween the second and third
draftswas just 0.48. Even though the progress between the second and third draftswas
not significant, it must be noted that the difference between the first and third drafts
was 2.64, which is a considerable success.

36

�Journal of Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics

In the category of organization, students scored an average of 3.2 in the first draft.
The second draft showed a considerable difference, with the average rising to 6.68. A
slighter difference was detected between the second and third drafts, where the
average score was 6.8. Nevertheless, students’ progress in organizing their essays
from the first draft to the second showed a very significant difference of 2.48, while
the third draft improved on the secondby just 1.12. It should also be noted that in all
three categories discussed so far, students made greater progress between their first
and the second drafts than between their second and third drafts. In the organization
category, total progress between the first and third draftswas 3.6, which is higher
than the total improvement in the first two categories, especially support.
Vocabulary and sentence structure is the fourth category that was analyzed in the
three student drafts. In the first draft, students’ performance with respect to the
vocabulary they used and their sentencestructure resulted in an average of 3.84. The
second draft showed an average increase to 5.76, while the students’ average scores
rose to 7.28 in the third draft. In this category, students’ progress between the three
drafts was more equal than in the first three categories. There was a difference of
1.92 between the first and the second draft, while the progress between the second
and the third drafts showed a difference of 1.52. The overall progress from the first
draft to the last one in this category was 3.68, slightly higher than the total progress
in the organization category.
The fifth category, grammar and spelling,presented the following outcomes:The
average score in the first draft was 4.48 – the highest first-draft average in all five
categories. The average scoresin the second and the third draftswere 6.48 and 7.84,
respectively. The difference between the first and second draft was 2 points, whereas
the difference between the second and the third drafts was 1.36. Overall, students’
scores improved by 3.36 points between the first and third drafts, which is
approximately the same as theirrate of progress in the introduction category.

Conclusions
The findings of this research not only reflect the expected outcomes,but also provide
insight into some interesting points with respect to writing instruction. Research on
students’ progress in writing has been an issue for decades and has covered many
important aspects of writing. The interpretation of the findings is similar to the
results of some research projects, but different from others. This may reflect the
different nature of the sample that each researcher uses.
The results of this research point toa need for other related studies. If EFL students
respond positively to creative writing instruction, it would be interesting to find out
whether adult students of English as a foreign language respond in a similar manner.
37

�Evaluating ESL Students’ Creativity in Writing

Other in-depth investigations into feedback and its effects on language
learningmightprovide more interesting insights on the proper way to respond to
student writing.
Teachers and educators should practice creative writing so that students can produce
a ‘self work’.
The outcomes of teaching creative writing are enormous for language learners. In
addition to practicing new vocabulary, students practice structure deductively and at
the same time concentrate on the content.
Writing drafts and peer feedback are closely connected to the final evaluation.
Teachers have the main say when evaluating creative writing. Using an evaluation
chart is helpful both for the teacher and the student writer.
This study answers several questions. Clearly, creative writing makes students better
writers. This does not mean that students who practice creative writing are able to do
well in other writing approaches, but it helps in creating writing habits.
Creative writing is also an approach to writing that finds a good place in
literature.Creative writing, also known as a poetic or artistic writing, can help
students become better writers.

References
Baer,J. &amp; Mc Kool, Sh. (2009). Assessing creativity using the consensual
assessment technique. USA, IGI Global.
Black, Paul and Wiliam, Dylan (1998). Assessment and Classroom Learning.
Assessment in Education: Principles, Policy &amp; Practice, Vol. 5. Issue 1. pg.
7-74. Print
Bishop, W.(1990). Released into a language: options for teaching creative
writing. Printed in USA, National Council of Teachers of English
1111Kenyon Road, Urbana, Illinois 61801.
Elbow, P. (1991).Reflections on Academic Discourse: How It Relates to Freshmen
and Colleagues. College English, Vol. 53. No. 2. pg. 135-155.
Elbow, P. (1998). Writing without teachers. New York City: Oxford
University Press, Inc.
Emërllahu,
D.(1998).
Bazat
e
MetodikëssëPunësEdukative
FakultetiiMësuesisëiUniversitetittëPrishtinës.
38

.Prishtinë:

�Journal of Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics

Harasim, L.&amp;Hiltz, S. R. &amp;Teles, L. &amp;, Turoff, M. (1997) A field guide to
teaching and learning online;Learning Networks. London, England:The
MIT Press, Cambridge, Massachusetts.
Hyland, K. &amp; Hyland, F. (2006) Language Teaching. Feedback on second
language students’ writing.USA:Cambridge University Press. Retrieved on
March
25,
2014
from:
http://epi.sc.edu/ar/AS_4_files/Hyland%20and%20Hyland,%202006.pdf
Kaufman, S. B. &amp; Christopher, E.M. &amp; Kaufman, J.C. (2008). The Genius
Portfolio: How do poets earn their creative reputations from multiple
products.Empirical Studies of the Arts, Vol. 26. No.2. pg.181-196.
Retrieved on 27 March 2014 from: http://scottbarrykaufman.com/wpcontent/uploads/2011/06/Kaufman-Christopher-Kaufman-2008.pdf
Leki, I. (1998). Academic writing-Exploring processes and strategies, New York
City: Cambridge University Press
Lillis,

Th. M. (2001). Student Writing: Access,
London:Routledge 11 New Fetter Lane, EC4P 4EE.

Regulation,

Desire.

Langan, J. (1997).College writing skills with readings (4th Ed.) United States of
America: McGraw- Hill Companies, Inc.
Major, W (1994). Freewriting: A Means of Teaching Critical Thinking to College
Freshmen.
Retrieved
on
April
3,
2014
from:
http://grammar.ccc.commnet.edu/grammar/composition/major_freewritin
g.htm
Oshima, A. &amp; Hogue, A. (1998). Writing Academic English. New York City:
Addison Wessley Longman.
Reid, J. M. (1993). Teaching ESL writing. United States of America:Prentice Hall
Regents
Steinberg, M. (2000) Peninsula: Essays and Memories from Michigan. Michigan:
Michigan State University Press

39

�</text>
                  </elementText>
                </elementTextContainer>
              </element>
            </elementContainer>
          </elementSet>
        </elementSetContainer>
      </file>
    </fileContainer>
    <elementSetContainer>
      <elementSet elementSetId="1">
        <name>Dublin Core</name>
        <description>The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.</description>
        <elementContainer>
          <element elementId="79">
            <name>Extent</name>
            <description>The size or duration of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3740">
                <text>2783</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="50">
            <name>Title</name>
            <description>A name given to the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3741">
                <text>Evaluating ESL Students’ Creativity in Writing</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="96">
            <name>Author</name>
            <description>Author</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3742">
                <text>Toci, Arta</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="94">
            <name>Abstract</name>
            <description>A summary of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3743">
                <text>Writing as a productive skill isan integral part of the language-learning process.  However, students do not consider writing an easy skill to learn and many ESL teachers certainly consider it a difficult skill to teach.Creative writing normally refers to the production of texts that have an aesthetic rather than a purely informative, instrumental or pragmatic purpose. Creative writing in ESL classes has started developing lately, but only to be incorporated as a supportive skill in teaching writing.Responding to students’ writing is an important issue to discuss when considering teaching creative writing. Response is a process that includes peer review, peer editing and continuous feedback through the stages of creative writing. By providing constructive feedback, the teacherunderstandsa writer’s problems and intentions by making students responsible for finding and analyzing what needs to be improved.      Key words: teaching, writing, creativity, feedback, assessment</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="40">
            <name>Date</name>
            <description>A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3744">
                <text>2015</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="97">
            <name>Keywords</name>
            <description>Keywords.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3745">
                <text>Article
PeerReviewed</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
        </elementContainer>
      </elementSet>
    </elementSetContainer>
    <tagContainer>
      <tag tagId="70">
        <name>L Education (General),LF Individual institutions (Europe),LT Textbooks</name>
      </tag>
    </tagContainer>
  </item>
  <item itemId="488" public="1" featured="0">
    <fileContainer>
      <file fileId="511">
        <src>https://omeka.ibu.edu.ba/files/original/fb32c6dea4cd08dbe198d7df5a4219b6.pdf</src>
        <authentication>a9108b186e492ed5e5c5f0ba28c40f96</authentication>
        <elementSetContainer>
          <elementSet elementSetId="4">
            <name>PDF Text</name>
            <description/>
            <elementContainer>
              <element elementId="52">
                <name>Text</name>
                <description/>
                <elementTextContainer>
                  <elementText elementTextId="3753">
                    <text>Journal of Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics

Conceptual Blending in Children’s Games as a Model for
Double-Scope Creativity and New Learning Opportunities
Gabriela Tucan
West University
Timisoara, Romania
Submitted: 16.04.2014.
Accepted: 10.11.2014.
Abstract
Fauconnier and Turner (2002, pp. 389-396) provide an overview of how blending
affects the course of a human life, and more specifically, how young children are
engaged in building complex blends in very early stages of their lives. Their detailed
analysis shows that only after the young child is able to master culturally recognized
blends will s/he be effectively ‘living in the blend’ and prove capable of further
achieving other blends with more flexibility.
During early childhood, it appears that learning and mental development are
intrinsically linked to our human ability to blend and deblend. Besides engaging in
direct cultural blends, the young child can operate on conceptual blends that are not
physically (biologically) given. For instance, this may happen when their imaginative
processes are at work in a wide variety of games or fun activities, starting with Lego
construction sets to fictive interactions with imaginary companions. In such games
and activities, children manifest an extraordinary capacity for double-scope blending.
Therefore, by playing games or getting involved in free activities, young children
will bring to mastery mental integrations that are essential for their lives as adults.
In this light, the paper examines a set of children-designed games and activities that
can all account for cases of fictive or potential reality. That is, the mental spaces
created do not refer directly to entities in the outside world. I argue that an analysis
of such fantasy mental spaces (with the tools of the mental space theory) can shed
new light on learning and human creativity. While playing and blending mental
spaces with their counterfactual counterparts, the young subject has to manipulate
his/her ‘split self’ (Lakoff &amp; Johnson 1999) or counterfactual self. With the
knowledge of early evolution of conceptual blending in children’s games, I propose
that educators may apply the results in diverse areas of instruction and learning in
order to better deal with the cognitive side of learning, and eventually come to terms
with human creativity.

99

�Conceptual Blending in Children’s Games as a Model for Double-Scope Creativity and New Learning
Opportunities

Keywords: blends, early childhood, mental development, children-designed games

Introduction
In the exceptional and emotionally charged story of his autobiographical memoir,
Joseph Anton, Salman Rushdie (2012) fights the crucial battle for writer’s freedom
and – at all costs – for freedom of speech. He instructs us that in an era when we are
being pushed toward “ever-narrower definitions of ourselves” (p. 576), and hence
toward narrower identities, literature ought to encourage a multiplicity of identities.
The human self is heterogeneous rather than homogenous: “not one thing but many,
multiple, fractured and contradictory” (p. 576). Writers and readers with broad
identities will always find common ground with fictional characters and, most
importantly, using that knowledge, they find points of identification with their fellow
beings.
Rushdie’s distinction between ‘narrow’ and ‘broad’ identities shows one of the most
fundamental features of our inner lives: the distinction between the human Subject
and our multiple selves. If the Subject makes what we uniquely are, the self is the
sum total of our thoughts, experiences, and actions. In order to construct the sense of
self, the human being changes social roles and becomes acquainted with multiple
personal histories. The Subject or ‘our essence’ as the locus of human consciousness
differs from the self in many different aspects. Admittedly, as Rushdie explains in his
memoir, “the person you were for your parents was not the person you were with
your children, your working self was other than your self as a lover, and depending
on the time of day and your mood you might think of yourself as tall or skinny or
unwell or a sports fan or conservative or fearful or hot” (p. 575-576). It is as if the
‘home self’, the ‘lover self’, the ‘work self’, or the ‘moody self’ were various facets
of different individuals, but still they all define one unique body.

The split self
It seems that our multiple fractured selves are under the direct control of others and
our constructed identity is the reflection of external realities. If this is true, we grow
up learning to constantly adapt to stories created outside our self. More specifically,
this is how we actually learn how to behave and act like others; which means that
from the very beginning we start to experience ourselves as split identities. This is
not to say, however, that infants are blank slates written on by others, since they are
all born with a set of representational and perceptual capacities.
While we are generally perfectly willing to admit that parents or adults are the prime
source for imitation, we have yet to address the question of imitation more pointedly
100

�Journal of Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics

in order to show that learning by imitation largely defines our understanding of the
split self. With this goal in focus, my thesis is that early imitation is a foundation for
the emergence of more selves in the subject. I contend that it is precisely in early
childhood forms of entertainment, as expressed in a host of imitation games (pretend
play, make-believe, fantasy or imaginative play, etc.) that our sense of self begins to
take a bifurcating shape. But the analysis will also go one step further in arguing that
an examination of children’s fantasies provides insight into the imitative mind.

Early imitation – a way to learning and communication
The recent interest of theorists in the theme of imitation from across disciplines has
given rise to diverse lines of inquiry (see the edited collections by Nehaniv &amp;
Dautenhahn, 2007; Meltzoff &amp; Prinz, 2002). In this study, the term ‘imitation’ is
broadly used to refer to types of imitation used in pretend games in which young
children reproduce behaviours that they have witnessed prior to the instance of
reproduction.
Very early evidence of imitation can be found in infants. In a series of studies,
Meltzoff and Moore (1994, 1998) demonstrate that imitation allows infants to
determine the identity of others by replaying an imitative game they had played
before with the same person. In time, this predominantly nonverbal communication
realized in infant imitation develops into more mature and more abstract
manifestations that will retain a sense of others. By imitating adults, infants of
different ages may start to recognize what they share with other people and later this
realization can open the door into the social world.
The interpersonal or social relationships with parents and household members from
birth force us to continually evaluate our actions in the light of how others evaluate
what we do and how others choose to perform the same actions. It is this interplay
between personal experience and external influence that will shape our self as adults.
As the human brain develops, so does the mind– but this can only happen in the
presence of others. Young children depend on others to such a great extent that their
early experience of self mirrors a cluster of influences that have touched their lives
until that moment. Therefore, juveniles are able to evolve through different social
interactions and only through continually receiving socially relevant information. By
imitating the social models around us, young children continually shape and reshape
their selves in order to adjust to new changing contexts and novel roles.
However, compelling scientific evidence proves that the brain is primarily
responsible for who we are. Any dysfunctions of the brain caused by accidents,
drugs, or aging processes may temporarily or definitely alter our perceptions of the
101

�Conceptual Blending in Children’s Games as a Model for Double-Scope Creativity and New Learning
Opportunities

self. The individual radically becomes a different person. But yet brains do not live in
isolation – rather “each brain exists in an ocean of other brains that affect how it
works” (Hood 2012, p.17). This ultimately indicates that the self is not only modelled
by our brains but is equally influenced by the external world that assaults us at all
times and sends signals that are to be interpreted and internalized by our brains.
Most importantly, the development of our socially created self is a long modelling
process that takes place throughout our lives and occupies the largest part of early
childhood.
These last points highlight imitation as a social tool serving multiple purposes. At
various levels, imitation can be used to initiate and maintain social interaction; it can
be a mode of inter-personal communication. My paper also works on the same
assumption that early imitation has a significant social function.

The split self engages in pretend play
In this section I propose that young children not only imitate to engage socially with
others and to create their social selves, but imitation is seen as a cognitive ability to
project oneself onto another or other entity in a hypothetical situation. Being able to
simultaneously hold more than one identity in different mental spaces develops the
concept of separate conceptual selves. I argue that pretend play or fantasy games can
account for the cognitive function of imitation.
Why do children construct online fictions? How do minds construct and share such
imaginative mental constructs? In addressing these questions, I will rely on G.
Fauconnier’s mental space theory (1994, 1997) that convincingly advances the view
that humans are able to integrate two or more mental spaces as they speak, listen to a
string of speech, or read texts. Mental spaces are partial mental constructs set up as
the conceptualizer perceives, understands, remembers, or imagines a particular
scenario. In short, mental space theory is a useful tool for analysing how individuals
interpret sequences of spoken and written language.
In this light, the paper examines instances of mental space mapping in children’s
fantasy plays. In most pretend games, children share a communicative situation as
the starting point and then project themselves onto another imaginary entity trying to
imitate its behaviour and actions. As such, play companions inhabit the body of
fictive participants in an imaginary scenario that may not correspond to the one in the
real situation of communication. Importantly, the playfellows are physically present
but the verbal interaction takes place strictly in the fantasy world. It is interesting to
examine how such imaginary verbal interaction is represented in the minds of the
participants. More specifically, how they can make mental contact with potential
realities that would otherwise have a non-interactional relationship. The type of face102

�Journal of Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics

to-face communication carried out during a fantasy play bears resemblance with
what Pascual (2002, 2008) and Brandt (2008) call “fictive interaction”. Such
interactional structure does not mirror the observable communicative situation and
“constitutes an invisible – although equally present and critical – channel of
communication between fictive participants, who may or may not correspond to
those in the actual situation of communication” (Pascual 2008, p. 81).
The examples selected for detailed analysis come from V. Gussin Paley’s A Child’s
Work: The Importance of Fantasy Play. While playing, pre-school children are able
to create with spontaneity highly imaginative stories and carry the plot and characters
to places they have never visited. Let us look at the case of a child who engages in a
fantasy play:
Pretend I’m your baby dinosaur and I’m lost, and then you call
me but I don’t come because I have a different name now and
then you hear a noise and you think it’s a wolf but you can’t call
me because you don’t know my name now. (p. 16)
As revealed in the example above, in this fascinating pretend game, the child is split
into two individuals in the GAME space and the FANTASY mental space. It
involves simultaneously the split of the self into two parts. The same individual in
actuality is referred to both as a playmate in reality and as a ‘baby dinosaur’ in the
fictional scenario. The child in the REALITY space is safe from any worries and
dangers and begins to stage an exciting story with a real play companion. They seem
to know each other well and both enjoy the suspense of the pretend play. On the
other hand, his counterpart in fiction takes a new identity (‘the baby dinosaur’) and a
new name, gets lost and is unable to help his friend. He speaks as if he were the
metamorphosed baby dinosaur. In the scenario of the pretend game, there is no direct
reference to the other playfellow, but one may assume he is also in an altered
condition. In their fictitious setting, the wolf impersonating the danger cannot be
stopped because the fictional counterparts, bearing small resemblance to the
playfellows in reality, do not know each other by name. All these fictional elements
in the pretend play do not directly mirror the world. The wolf and the increasing
tension are only present in the game and the two playmates with their counterparts in
fiction contradict what they experience in actuality. In brief, the world defined by the
children’s fantasy game not only splits the referents into two dissimilar parts but it
also provides insight into the playmates’ cognitive capacities for representing such
imaginary worlds.
It seems, then, that fantasy play entails imagining a fictive identity and engaging in
fictive interaction. In their imagined interaction, there are two metamorphosed
interactants (the baby dinosaur and perhaps another animal) who engage in
imaginary topics of conversation, but the speech and the bodies correspond to the
103

�Conceptual Blending in Children’s Games as a Model for Double-Scope Creativity and New Learning
Opportunities

actual playmates. True, the fictive communication of the represented entities does
not necessarily relate to the experiential domain but undeniably it has a physical
grounding (the playing ground, the playmates, etc.). The child departs from the
REALITY space or the BASE space to construct a potential or a hypothetical space,
set up by the space builder pretend. The playfellows no longer talk about what they
do in their actual world but what they pretend they share in their imaginary world.
With respect to the previous factual space, the second mental space sets up a
counterfactual scenario in an alternative situation, with characters behaving as if they
were something else. In this hypothetical space, the fictional counterpart of the
second companion hears a noise and interprets it as danger. He thinks it is a wolf,
which partitions the discourse into a further BELIEVE space, but he can’t call his
fictional companion because he doesn’t know his name. The conjunction but clearly
shows the contrast between the need for help and the impossibility to ask for it.
For further analysis, let us look at another example of a pretend game:
“Pretend I’m the good mother.”
“Is there a mean one?”
“The step one? No, only one mother, the nice one.”
“Let’s both be baby sisters and our nice mother isn’t lost yet.”
“Was she lost or are we lost?”
“Not yet. No one is lost. This is the part where we’re still happy.”
(p.19)
As in the other fantasy game, the space builder ‘pretend’ represents an overt indicator
that opens up a new virtual mental space. The dialogue script shifts focus to a space
in which the fellow companions become ‘baby sisters’ watched by their ‘nice
mother’ who has not been lost yet. The final scenario is set up gradually after the
participants hesitantly evaluate the other options: who could be the ‘good mother’
and whether there is ‘a step mother’. In this fictive address, the interactants also
evaluate their new roles and, in this way, they can learn what they think of the
individuals talked about in real situations of communication. This means that the
underlying configuration of their fictive interaction bears the mark of the
participants’ social experience and of their exposure to similar situated exchanges.
The pretend space builder not only requires the conceptualization of a hypothetical
mental space but it also requires the integration of incompatible structure. Even
though ‘the baby sisters’ know that they and their ‘good mother’ may be lost in the
real story, they set up potential realities in which nobody is lost and time is halted to
a never-ending happiness.
It is interesting to look at the following engaging fantasy play in which children
rewrite the story of The Little Red Riding Hood:

104

�Journal of Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics

“You be the mother,” she tells Cora. “You have to come with me
in case there’s a wolf.”
“First we see the hunter,” Cora decides. “He already banged at
the wolf.”
“But you didn’t tell me don’t talk to the wolf!”
“No, see, this is the first real way it goes. The wolf sees the
mother and so he runs away.” (21)
Clearly, children enjoy such fantasy games for their entertainment value. But more
significantly, nevertheless, they do not simply participate in the game with the
purpose of enjoying the imagined stories as such: they play out concepts and beliefs
from experience, animate entities, and present imaginary scenarios affectionately.
The alternative framework of the story allows for complementary improvement of
the original storyline: the bad wolf sees the mother and runs away. Interestingly, in
their fictive interaction the fictional mother and girl incorporate conversational cues
from the original story: ‘But you didn’t tell me don’t talk to the wolf!’The speaker
seems to suggest that they need to repeat exactly the lessons learned experientially or
taken directly from the original story. In other words, the desire to imitate the
behaviours and beliefs of the original scenario takes them back to the BASE space of
actuality. However, the other communicative participant presents her suggestion to
keep the virtual space because it seems safe and ‘the first real way’ for a turn of the
story.

Blending and double-scope creativity in (pretend) games
The various case studies presented in the previous section give evidence of the fact
that, when involved in fantasy games, participants set up mental spaces as imaginary
scenarios, interconnect them, and modify them as discourse unfolds. On the other
hand, this is not the whole story of the imitative mind. For instance, the sentence
“pretend I’m your baby dinosaur and I’m lost...” requires not only the
conceptualization of a hypothetical mental space, but it also requires the mapping of
incompatible mental spaces. Even though in the BASE space the playmates are real
individuals who feel safe from any trouble, they can still imagine themselves as nonhuman figures facing danger and risking their lives. The discovery that individuals
are able to imagine such a situation contrary to facts with essential consequences for
thinking led cognitive scientists G. Fauconnier and M. Turner (2002, 2006) (see also
Turner 1996) to advance the theory of conceptual blending.
This pretend game is a double-scope network (Fauconnier and Turner 2002, p. 131139) that has input spaces with clashing structures. There is disanalogy between the
safe playmate in the BASE space and the lost baby dinosaur in the second input.
Further, in the space of reality both companions know each other well whereas in the
counterfactual space there is no communication. If the first input is free of danger,
105

�Conceptual Blending in Children’s Games as a Model for Double-Scope Creativity and New Learning
Opportunities

the presence of the wolf in the second input emphasises the clashing differences. But
the inputs are not simply juxtaposed. The imagined situation in which the second
playmate cannot call for help and thus may be caught by the wolf is understood as
the blended space.
Evidence of blending or conceptual integration can be found in other similarly
engaging children’s activity. For instance, when a two-year-old picks up a banana
and talks into it as if it were a mobile phone, s/he proves to have collected important
pieces of cultural information to be later used for making other useful connections.
With the highly imaginative Lego construction sets, the child can play, build and
rebuild. The player constructs towers, castle, cars, or other miniature objects
replicating physical objects from the surrounding reality. When the building is
finished, players may want to change pieces, move one tower to another place, or
make the castle taller; all these additions are only limited by the physical
characteristics of the building blocks that cannot be divided or changed into a
different size or shape. Gravity may sometimes spoil the fun. Otherwise, no one
really instructs children on such physical constraints but they will know quite
precisely what rules satisfy their constructions.
Endowed with the capacity for integration, the child will take that information from
the surrounding cultural stimuli and use that knowledge in their play. The fact that
they may have already experienced boat trips and bridge crossings, they may have
seen pictures of towered castles, or they may have witnessed different actions and
behaviour gives them enough stimuli to reproduce them out of Lego sets. Such
construction games are much more than simply imaginative imitation games: they
are useful applications of early forms of human imagination. Building and rebuilding
construction sets creatively and resourcefully reflects the making and unmaking of
conceptual integration networks.

Concluding remarks
In this paper I have argued that early imitation constitutes a form of social
engagement that also helps infants develop the concepts of self and others. Analysis
suggested that through multiple forms of imitation, the self is largely shaped by
people around us. It is through imitation that we experience ourselves as split. I
further proposed that every sort of fantasy game that children play can express a
sense of others and reveal the split in the self. The manifestations of imitation in
fantasy or pretend games may be concerned with the social function of imitation, but
most importantly, with how the self and the other are coded in the minds. More
generally, children engage in fantasy games for their immensely entertaining value
but, at the same time, they begin to act out theatrically on the stage of their creative
106

�Journal of Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics

minds. By projecting themselves onto someone else or something else, the self of the
young individual takes a bifurcating shape that allows them to develop broad
identities. Such a fundamental cognitive activity involving the dramatization of the
self helps us later understand such puzzling language: “If I were you, I'd hate me
too” (Johnson &amp; Lakoff 1999, p. 281). If fantasy games seem to impact upon the
individual’s identity, they can be used as valuable teaching tools.

References
Brandt, L. (2008). A semiotic approach to fictive interaction as a representational
strategy in communicative meaning construction. In Oakley, T. &amp;
Hougaard, A. (Eds.). Mental spaces in discourse and interaction (109148).Amsterdam/Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins.
Fauconnier, G. (1994).Mental spaces: Aspects of meaning construction in natural
language. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Fauconnier, G. (1997). Mappings in thought and language. Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press.
Fauconnier, G., &amp; Turner, M. (2002). The way we think: Conceptual blending
the mind’s hidden complexities. New York: Basic Books.

and

Fauconnier, G., &amp; Turner, M. (2006). Mental spaces: Conceptual integration
networks. In Geeraerts, D. (Ed.). Cognitive linguistics. Basic readings
(303-371). Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.
Gussin Paley, V. (2004). A child’s work: The importance of fantasy play. Chicago
and London: The University of Chicago Press.
Hood, B. (2012). The self illusion. London: Constable.
Lakoff, G., &amp; Johnson, M. (1999). Philosophy in the flesh: The embodied mind
its challenge to western thought. New York: Basic Books.

and

Meltzoff, A. N. &amp; Moore, M. K.(1994). Imitation, memory, and the
representation of persons. Infant Behavior and Development, 17, 83–99.
Meltzoff, A. N., &amp; Moore, M. K. (1998). Object representation, identity, and the
paradox of early permanence: Steps toward a new framework. Infant
Behavior and Development, 21,201–235.

107

�Conceptual Blending in Children’s Games as a Model for Double-Scope Creativity and New Learning
Opportunities

Meltzoff, A. N., &amp; Prinz, W. (2002). (Eds.) The imitative mind: Development,
evolution, and brain bases. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Nehaniv, L. C., &amp; Dautenhahn, K. (Eds.) (2007). Imitation and social learning in
robots,
humans
and
animals
.
Behavioural,
social
and
communicativedimensions. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Pascual, E. (2002). Imaginary trialogues: Conceptual blending and fictive
interaction in criminal courts. Utrecht: LOT.
Pascual, E. (2008). Fictive interaction blends in everyday life and courtroom
settings. In Oakley, T. &amp; Hougaard, A. (Eds.). Mental spaces in discourse
and interaction (79-108).Amsterdam/Philadelphia, PA: John
Benjamins.
Rushdie, S. (2012). Joseph Anton. A memoir. New York: Random House.
Turner, M. (1996). Conceptual blending and counterfactual argument in the social
and behavioral sciences. In Tetclock, T. &amp;Belkin, A. (Eds.).
Counterfactual thought experiments in world politics: Logical,
methodological, and psychological perspectives (291-295). Princeton NJ:
Princeton University Press.

108

�</text>
                  </elementText>
                </elementTextContainer>
              </element>
            </elementContainer>
          </elementSet>
        </elementSetContainer>
      </file>
    </fileContainer>
    <elementSetContainer>
      <elementSet elementSetId="1">
        <name>Dublin Core</name>
        <description>The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.</description>
        <elementContainer>
          <element elementId="79">
            <name>Extent</name>
            <description>The size or duration of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3747">
                <text>2787</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="50">
            <name>Title</name>
            <description>A name given to the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3748">
                <text>Conceptual Blending in Children’s Games as a Model for Double-Scope Creativity and New Learning Opportunities</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="96">
            <name>Author</name>
            <description>Author</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3749">
                <text>Tucan, Gabriela</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="94">
            <name>Abstract</name>
            <description>A summary of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3750">
                <text>Fauconnier and Turner (2002, pp. 389-396) provide an overview of how blending affects the course of a human life, and more specifically, how young children are engaged in building complex blends in very early stages of their lives. Their detailed analysis shows that only after the young child is able to master culturally recognized blends will s/he be effectively ‘living in the blend’ and prove capable of further achieving other blends with more flexibility.     During early childhood, it appears that learning and mental development are intrinsically linked to our human ability to blend and deblend. Besides engaging in direct cultural blends, the young child can operate on conceptual blends that are not physically (biologically) given. For instance, this may happen when their imaginative processes are at work in a wide variety of games or fun activities, starting with Lego construction sets to fictive interactions with imaginary companions. In such games and activities, children manifest an extraordinary capacity for double-scope blending. Therefore, by playing games or getting involved in free activities, young children will bring to mastery mental integrations that are essential for their lives as adults.     In this light, the paper examines a set of children-designed games and activities that can all account for cases of fictive or potential reality. That is, the mental spaces created do not refer directly to entities in the outside world. I argue that an analysis of such fantasy mental spaces (with the tools of the mental space theory) can shed new light on learning and human creativity. While playing and blending mental spaces with their counterfactual counterparts, the young subject has to manipulate his/her ‘split self’ (Lakoff &amp; Johnson 1999) or counterfactual self.  With the knowledge of early evolution of conceptual blending in children’s games, I propose that educators may apply the results in diverse areas of instruction and learning in order to better deal with the cognitive side of learning, and eventually come to terms with human creativity.     Keywords: blends, early childhood, mental development, children-designed games</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="40">
            <name>Date</name>
            <description>A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3751">
                <text>2015</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="97">
            <name>Keywords</name>
            <description>Keywords.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3752">
                <text>Article
PeerReviewed</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
        </elementContainer>
      </elementSet>
    </elementSetContainer>
    <tagContainer>
      <tag tagId="70">
        <name>L Education (General),LF Individual institutions (Europe),LT Textbooks</name>
      </tag>
    </tagContainer>
  </item>
  <item itemId="489" public="1" featured="0">
    <fileContainer>
      <file fileId="512">
        <src>https://omeka.ibu.edu.ba/files/original/a0d32274e9842b6e4a87ccb2d2b57987.pdf</src>
        <authentication>0efe7a3fe9e186c688017a4cb7cef379</authentication>
        <elementSetContainer>
          <elementSet elementSetId="4">
            <name>PDF Text</name>
            <description/>
            <elementContainer>
              <element elementId="52">
                <name>Text</name>
                <description/>
                <elementTextContainer>
                  <elementText elementTextId="3761">
                    <text>Journal of Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics

Designing a Translation and Interpretation Diploma Course
Luis Armando Villalobos Nájera
Universidad Autónoma de Aguascalientes, Mexico
Submitted: 16.04.2014.
Accepted: 12.11.2014.

Abstract
The objective of this paper is to share the experiences regarding the design and
implementation of a Translation and Interpretation Diploma Course (TIDC) in a
public university located in central Mexico.The main point of designing and
implementing the diploma course was to produce a new generation of translators and
interpreters, since a number of BA in ELT graduates from local universities,as well
as many other translators from the region, wish to grow professionally in both
translation and interpretation areas.Moreover, the implementation of this diploma
course was necessarybecause no institutions in this region offer a course of this kind.
The TIDCwas designed taking into account the demand for professional translators
and interpreters derived from the industrial and commercial growth in the state of
Aguascalientes, Mexico.
The curriculum for the TIDCconsists of 14 modulescentered on thetheoretical aspects
of translation and thetranslation practice of financial, scientific, technical and legal
texts. Spanish writing, terminology, and CAT tools training are also part of the
curriculum.The students are also introduced to Consecutive and Simultaneous
Interpretation using theappropriate interpretation equipment.Allacademic staffinvited
to collaborate in this program hold an MA in Translation and Interpretation. They are
also certified translators and currently teach translation and interpretation in various
universities. Most of them belong to translators and interpreters associations.
Key words: translation theory, translation training, interpretation, syllabus, design,
implementation.
The idea of designing theTranslation and Interpretation Diploma Course (TIDC)
emerged from the increasing demand for professional translators and interpreters
derived from the industrial and commercial boom in the state of Aguascalientesthat
started a few decades ago. Numerous national and international companies
established in Aguascalientes, mostly related to the automotive industry, demand
translation and interpretation services in order to succeed in today’s global economy.
157

�Designing a Translation and Interpretation Diploma Course

In addition to the business and industry sectors, academic institutions also need
professional translation and interpretation services in their diverse activities.
Moreover, consecutive interpreting and simultaneous interpreting have become a
necessity for the different congresses, seminars, and meetings that continuously take
place in the state of Aguascalientes.

The Current Situation of Translation and Interpretation Studies in
Mexico
Translation and interpretation studieshave evolved along with globalization in
Mexico, the fifth-largest country in the Americas. However, this evolution does not
seem sufficient to cover the demand for translation and interpretation services of a
country with an estimated population of 118 million. According to a research
conducted by the author, a total of nine Master’sdegree programs in Translation and
Interpretation are offered in only six of Mexico’s 32 states, while only10
institutionsin states including Mexico Cityoffer degrees in Translation and
Interpretation.Finally, only seven institutionsconcentrated in Mexico City offer
diploma courses in translation and/or interpretation. As a consequence,mainly due to
the lack of availability in their place of residence, a number of students interested in
Translation and Interpretation studies find it difficult to enroll in translation and/or
interpretationcourses. The situation is quite similarin Aguascalientes, since no
academic institutions offer programsor courses related to Translation studies.

The Translation and Interpretation Diploma Course Curriculum
In this paper, the term “curriculum” refers to the academic content taught in a
specific course or program that also includes learning objectives, materials and
assessment methods.It is important to mention that according to Nunan (1988), all
elements contained in a given curriculummust be integrated in order to avoid
conflicts when making decisions at different levels of such curriculum. In this
particular case, the author attempted to interconnect the elements of the curriculum
for the purpose of integrating and applyingthe students’ technical, professional, and
ethical skills acquired throughout the development of the diploma course.
On the other hand, Li(2006) claims that there is a “gap between translation training
and the real world of professional translation” (p. 615). In other words, students who
graduate from translation courses are not really prepared to face the challenges of
professional translation as most translation-course contents do not provide students
with enough translation practiceby employing authentic materials. Moreover,
sometimes translation teachers do not have enough professional experience in certain
specialized areas of translation. In light of the above, the author considered it
necessary to adopt amore suitable approach in order to meet students’ expectations.
158

�Journal of Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics

The main idea was to develop a curriculum that provided students with translation
practice in the technical, scientific, financial and legal areas, as well as to
includesome Terminology management and CAT tool training. Furthermore, Beeby
(2004) and Mackenzie (2004) suggest that since new technologies have
revolutionized translation, it is of great importance to provide the students with
translation-memory tools and terminology software in order to develop the future
professional translators’ competencies. Moreover, the correct use of such tools is
essential to guarantee quality in translation work, as asserted by Esmaieli (2009)and
Savelová (n.d.).
In view of the above, the contents of the TIDCcurriculum include authentic
translation tasks and simulated interpreting activities in an effort to integrate both the
process-oriented approach suggested by Gile (1995) and the practice-oriented
approach proposed byWilss(1996). This combination of approaches has been
suggested by Li (2006), who argued thatteachers currently focusmainlyon a productand/or practice-oriented approach because such approaches provide students with
many different types of translation tasks aimed at preparing them to face the real
world of professional translation.In addition to practice in translation skills, one of
theTIDC’s main objectives is to develop translation competencies in students, taking
into account the premise expressed by Mackenzie (2004) “Learning by doing,
knowing-how rather than knowing” (p. 33),which refers to using translation skills in
real or simulated situations as an essential part of translation training.

Translation and Interpretation Diploma courses in Mexico
However, it was necessary to make a comparison among other translation and
interpretation diploma courses offered in Mexicowith respect to their curricula
structure and contents in favor of obtaining more ideas for designing a practical
translation and interpretation diploma course. After having conducted an Internet
search, the author gathered information from six translation diploma courses and two
translation and interpretation diploma courses offered by various higher education
institutions in the country (see Table 1). The main purpose was to find out the types
of learning objectives established, the methodologies used, and the assessment
criteria employed. It was also important to know about tuition costs, thelength of the
courses and thenumber of modules.
The results showed that the translation and interpretation diploma courses offered by
private institutions were not affordable tomiddle-class students due to the high cost
of tuition, whereassimilar diploma courses offered by public universities were more
affordable. It was also found that the criteria followed in the admission requirements
varied a lot, but it was evident that prospective students needed to have a good
command of English andalso had to beproficient in their mother tongue.
159

�Designing a Translation and Interpretation Diploma Course

Another objective of this research was to find out if CAT-tool subjects and
terminology subjects formed partof the Diploma Courses’ curricula (see Table 2).
Contrary to what the author expected, only twoprivate universities included CATtool training in their courses. This is probably due to the fact that CAT-tool training
implies the purchase of licenses and,equally importantly,the availability of
translation teachers withCAT-tool knowledge. By contrast, seven institutions include
at least one Terminology subject in their course programs. This indicates that such
institutions are aware of the importance that Terminology management plays in the
translation process. In this respect, Palou (2012) supports the idea that the
management of terminological databases helps the translator to render translations
with language quality, accuracy, and consistency.

The Translation and Interpretation Diploma Course Subjects
It is important to point out that the TIDC consists of introductory subjects aimed at
providing students with the basic skills and knowledge of different areas of
Translation and Interpretation. The TIDC also aims to broaden students’ perspectives
and encourage them to become skilled translators and interpreters through their own
continuing professional development.
Another aspect of the TIDC that needs to be highlighted is that the teachers were
asked to apply translation theory to translation practice and to help the students
integrate and transfer the skills and knowledge theygained in one subject into the
subsequent subject in order to improve their translation and interpretation
competencies.

TIDC DeliveryMode
The author chose the Face-to-Face delivery method for the TIDC subjects with the
purpose of creating a positive classroom environment as a way to foster cooperative
learning. According to the author’s own teaching experience, Face-to-Face
instruction promotes a more effective interaction between the teacher and the
students, which makeslearning more effective. Another advantage of having the
students physically together is that they can make use of Language Department
facilities such as classrooms equipped with Internet access and LCD interactive
screens, the Lecture Hall for Simultaneous Interpreting practices, and the Language
Lab.
Considering that most of the prospective students are translators and English teachers
and in order to facilitate their attendance at the TIDC, classes will take place on
weekends: Friday afternoons from 4 to 8 pm and Saturdays from 8 am to 1 pm.
160

�Journal of Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics

TIDC Evaluation
The instruments for evaluating the TIDC are currently in the design process. The
evaluation instruments will consist of questionnaires and interviews for both teachers
and students. The feedback obtained will serve for further improvement of the TIDC.

Academic Staff
Anumber of studieshave shown that there is a strong relationship between teacher
quality andstudent achievement. For example, Buddin and Zamarro (2009),affirm
that“Teacher quality is a key element of student academic success” (p. 1). Likewise,
King (2003)states that “Teacher quality matters. In fact, it is the most important
school-related factor influencing student achievement”(v).Taking into account the
previous considerations, the author contactedqualified teachers in translation and
interpretation studies and invited themto participate in the TIDC.Five of the teachers
have the following profile:




Currently working as certified translators and interpreters.
Hold a Master´s degree in Translation and Interpretation
Currently teaching translation and interpretation at higher
academic institutions.

The rest of the academic staff consists of a PhD in Law teacher, an MA in Education
teacher, an MA in Philosophy teacher, an MA in Translation and CAT tools teacher,
and a BA in Hispanic Letters teacher.
The author considered that the quality of teaching offered in the TIDC was a more
effective way of attracting prospective students since quality in teaching may
improve the quality-of-learning outcome.

The Approval of the Translation and Interpretation Diploma Course
The proposal for the TIDCwas submitted, in accordance with the regulations of the
Autonomous University of Aguascalientes, to the University Executive Board and
wasapproved on November 13, 2013.

Implementation
Afteritsapproval, it was really important to develop a plan of action to promote the
TIDC with the purpose of attracting prospective students. The staff from the
161

�Designing a Translation and Interpretation Diploma Course

Continuous Education Department at the university designed a flyer announcing the
TIDCand a number of copies were distributed in the main commercial areas of the
city. Additionally, the Communication Department also designed a poster
announcing the TIDCand copies were posted throughout the Central Campus. In
addition, the Communication Department also invited the author to participate in a
university radio program to give general information about the TIDC.TheTIDCwas
also promoted ata Language Department meeting attended by approximately 100
teachers in December 2013. The poster announcing the TIDCappearedon the
Language Department’sFacebook page. Finally, the author sent e-mail messages to
local certified translators.
Before the end of the second semester of 2013, the Department of Continuous
Education set the dates for the Registration period. A total of 20 students,
mostly English teachers and translators, signed up for the TIDC.
The staff from the Continuous Education Department was in charge ofarranging
travel expenses, accommodation, and transportation for the external teachers. The
Language Department also organized the assignment of classrooms and labs for the
TIDCclasses.
Finally, the TIDC was inaugurated by the Humanities and Social Sciences
authorities. The ceremonywas held at the Lecture Hall of the Language Department
on February 7, 2014.

Conclusion
The author is aware that theTIDC will not fully satisfy the increasing demand for
translation and interpretation services in the state of Aguascalientessince it differs
from a Bachelor’s or Master’s degree in Translation and Interpretation. However, it
will probably mark the beginning of a new generation of translators and interpreters
in this region.Furthermore, the authorities of the Autonomous University of
Aguascalientes are considering using the TIDC as a starting point for a Master’s
Degreeprogram in Translation and Interpretation.

162

�Journal of Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics

References
Beeby, A. (2004). Language learning for translators. Designing a syllabus. In
Malmkjaer, K. Editor (2004).Translation in Undergraduate Degree
Programs. (p. 41). Amsterdam/Philadelphia. John Benjamins Publishing
Company.
DIPLOMADO EN TRADUCCIÓN INGLÉS-ESPAÑOL. ORGANIZACIÓN
MEXICANA DE TRADUCTORES, A.C. Retrieved from
http://www.omt.org.mx/diplomado1.htm
Diplomado en Traducción de Textos Especializados (DTTE). Universidad
Autónoma de México. Retrieved from
http://cele.unam.mx/index.php?categoria=3&amp;subcategoria=22&amp;contenido=7
9
Diplomados: Traducción. Metodología. Universidad Autónoma de Ciudad Juárez
Chihuahua. Retrieved from
http://www.uacj.mx/sa/asc/CELE/Paginas/Diplomados.aspx
Diplomado en Traducción de Textos Especializados. Instituto Tecnológico
Autónomo de México. Retrieved from
http://desarrolloejecutivo.itam.mx/extension/files%5CTemarios%5CProgram
a%2000002794%5CP_2794_TEM_953.PDF
Diplomado en Traducción e Interpretación. Universidad Iberoamericana. Retrieved
from
http://www.uia.mx/diplomados/default.html
Diplomado en Traducción. Universidad Juárez Autónoma de Tabasco. Retrieved
from
http://www.ujat.mx/interioradentro.aspx?NODO=123&amp;ID=3491
Diplomado Intérprete – Traductor. Berlitz Mexico. Retrieved from
http://www.berlitz.com.mx/cursos-idiomas/Diplomado-Int-rpreteTraductor/Caracter-sticas-del-programa/146/guiseid--2/
163

�Designing a Translation and Interpretation Diploma Course

Doherty, S. (2013) The Value of Effective Training in Translation and
Localization.Galaxy Newsletter Q3 2013.Retrieved from
https://www.gala-global.org/node/84770
Esmaieli, S. (2009).Necessity of tech integration into translation training
programs.Translation Directory.Com. Retrieved from
http://www.translationdirectory.com/articles/article2043.php
King, J. (2003) Teacher Quality. Understanding the Effectiveness of Teacher
Attributes. Economic Policy Institute. Retrieved from
http://www.epi.org/publication/books_teacher_quality_execsum_intro/
Li, D. (2006) “Translators as Well as Thinkers: Teaching of Journalistic Translation
in Hong Kong” Meta : journal des traducteurs / Meta: translators’ Journal,
vol. 51, nº 3, 2006, p. 611-619.
Mackenzie, R. (2004). The competencies required by the translator´s roles as a
professional. InMalmkjaer, K. (Ed.)Translation in Undergraduate Degree
Programs. (p. 32-33). Amsterdam/Philadelphia. John Benjamins Publishing
Company.
National Research Council.(2014) Educating Teachers of Science, Mathematics, and
Technology: New Practices for the New Millennium. Washington, DC: The
National Academies Press, 2000. (p. 44)
Nord, Ch. (1991). Text Analysis in Translation.Theory, Method, and Didactic
Application of a Model for TranslationOriented Text Analysis. Translated
from the German by Christiane Nord and Penelope Sparrow.
Amsterdam/Atlanta GA, Rodopi, 250 p. ISBN : 9051833113.
Nunan, D. (1988) Syllabus Design. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Palou, M. (2012) Managing Terminology for Translation Using Translation
Environment Tools: Towards a Definition of Best Practices. Unpublished
doctoral
dissertation.
University
of
Ottowa.
Retrieved
fromhttp://www.ruor.uottawa.ca/en/handle/10393/22837

164

�Journal of Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics

Appendix A
Table 1. Translation and Interpretation Diploma Courses in Mexico

Diplomado
Traducción e
Interpretación

Diplomado en
Traducción
Inglés-español
Diplomado en
Traducción de
Textos
Especializados

Diplomado
Traducción
Textos
Especializados
Diplomado en
Traducción e
Interpretación

Diplomado en
Traducción
Inglés-español
Diplomado en
Traducción

Diplomado
Traducción
(InglésEspañol)

Berlitz
Mexico City
Universidad
Autónoma de
Ciudad Juárez
Chihuahua,
Mexico
Organización
Mexicana de
Traductores
Jalisco, Mexico
Universidad
Autónoma de
México CELE
Mexico City

Instituto
Tecnológico
Autónomo de
México
Mexico City
Universidad
Autónoma de
Aguascalientes,
Mexico
Universidad
Intercontinental
Mexico City
Universidad
Juárez
Autónoma de
Tabasco,
Mexico
Universidad
Iberoamericana
Mexico City

Tuition

Admission
Requirements

Duration
(months)

Hours/
Credits

Diplomado
enTraducción

Institution

Modules

Name

4

576

$58,500.00 MX
(4,300.00 USD)

High School
80% English

12

7

280

$11.550.00 MX
(850.00 USD)

500 pts. TOEFL
ITP

16

10

160

30,000.00 MX
(2,200.00 USD)

Entrance
Examination

12

11

544/68

-

BA or BS degree
(4
semesters
minimum)
Advanced English
Level

12

6

180

$56,750.00 MX
(4,200.00 USD)

Good command of
English
and
Spanish

10

14

300/30

$16,000.00 MX
(1,185.00 USD)

79 pts. TOEFL iBT
or
550 pts. TOEFL
ITP
-

10

8

60

$27,680.00 MX
(2,050.00 USD)

2

120

$6,000.00 MX
(440.00 USD)

10

300

$51,100.00 MX
(3,785.00 USD)

8

Intermediate
English Level

Advanced English
Level/Advanced
Reading
and
Writing Skills in
Spanish

5

5

165

�Designing a Translation and Interpretation Diploma Course

Note. Data contained in this table was collected in 2014 and may change due to
updates.

Diplomado
IntérpreteTraductor
Diplomado
Traducción
e
Interpretación
Diplomado en
Traducción
Inglés-español
Diplomado en
Traducción de
Textos
Especializados
Diplomado
Traducción
Textos
Especializados
Diplomado en
Traducción
e
Interpretación

Diplomado en
Traducción
Inglés-Español
Diplomado
Traducción
Diplomado
Traducción

166

en

Berlitz
Mexico City
Universidad
Autónoma de Ciudad
Juárez
Chihuahua, Mexico
Organización
Mexicana
de
Traductores
Jalisco, Mexico
Universidad
Autónoma
de
México CELE
Mexico City
Instituto Tecnológico
Autónomo
de
México
Mexico City
Universidad
Autónoma
de
Aguascalientes
Aguascalientes,
Mexico
Universidad
Intercontinental
Campus Sur
Mexico City
Universidad Juárez
Autónoma
de
Tabasco
Tabasco, Mexico
Universidad
Iberoamericana

Totalof Subjects

CAT Tools
Subjects

Terminology
Subjects

Practical
Subjects

Institution

Theoretical
Subjects

Name

Modules/Subjects

Table 2. Characteristics of Translation and Interpretation Diploma Courses in
Mexico

4

5

11

-

-

16

7

3

4

-

-

7

10

-

-

1

-

-

11

9

2

1

-

11

6

3

3

3

-

6

14

5

9

1

1

14

8

3

5

1

1

8

2

-

-

2

-

2
(T/P)

10

2

8

1

1

10

�Journal of Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics

(InglésEspañol)

Mexico City

Note. Although recently created, the Translation and Interpretation Diploma Course
of the Autonomous University of Aguascalientes is included in this table for
comparison purposes.
Table 3. Translation and Interpretation Diploma Course Schedule 2014
Credits

1.
INTRODUCTION
TO
CONTEMPORARY
TRANSLATION THEORIES
2.
INTRODUCCIÓN
TO
TRANSLATION
TECHNIQUES
3.
INTRODUCCIÓN
TO
CONSECUTIVE
INTERPRETATION
4.
INTRODUCTION
TO
ENGLISH-SPANISH
CONTRASTIVE ANALYSIS
5.
SPANISH
WRITING
WORKSHOP
6.
INTRODUCTION
TO
TERMINOLOGY
7. INTRODUCTION TO CAT
TOOLS
8.
INTRODUCTION
TO
TECHNICAL TRANSLATION
9.
INTRODUCTION
TO
FINANCIAL AND ECONOMIC
TRANSLATION
10.
INTRODUCTION
TO
LEGAL TRANSLATION
11.
INTRODUCTION
TO
SIMULTANEOUS
INTERPRETATION
12. INTRODUCTIOON TO
SCIENTIFIC TRANSLATION
13.
INTRODUCTION
TO
TRANSLATION
AND
INTERPRETATION
COPYRIGHT
14. PROFESSIONAL ETHICS

Teaching Dates

Hours

Professors

M. en T. I. Michelle Cecilia
Arriola de la Mora

20

2

February 7, 8, 14
y 15

M. en C. E. Karla Valdez

20

2

February 21, 22 y
28 de ; March 1

M. en T. I. Michelle Cecilia
Arriola de la Mora

30

3

March 7, 8, 14,
15, 21 and 22

M. en T. I. Annie Smyrna
Hernández Zárate

20

2

March 28 and ;
April 4 and 5

L. en L.H. José Alberto García
Ventura
M. en T. I. Annie Smyrna
Hernández Zárate
M. en C. E. Laurent Slowack R.

20

2

20

2

20

2

M. en C. E. Laurent Slowack R.

20

2

M. en T.
MezaCuervo

Elena

20

2

April 11 and ;May
9 and 16
May 17, 24, 30
and 31
June 6, 7, 13 and
14
June 20, 21, 27
and 28
July 4, 5, 25 and
26

M. en T. I. Karen Bibiana
Camarena Gutiérrez
M. en T. I. Michelle Cecilia
Arriola de la Mora

20

2

30

3

M. en T. I. Katina Fernández
Cedi
Dr. en D. Miguel A. Marmolejo
Cervantes

20

2

20

2

Mtra. Ma.
Bautista

20

2

I.Beatriz

Teresa

De

Lira

August 1, 2, 8 and
9
August 16, 22, 23,
29
and
30;
September 5
September 6, 12,
13 and 19
September 20, 26,
27; October 3

October 4, 10, 11
and 17

167

�Designing a Translation and Interpretation Diploma Course

Note. Some teaching dates are not consecutive due to holidaydates and holiday
periods.

168

�</text>
                  </elementText>
                </elementTextContainer>
              </element>
            </elementContainer>
          </elementSet>
        </elementSetContainer>
      </file>
    </fileContainer>
    <elementSetContainer>
      <elementSet elementSetId="1">
        <name>Dublin Core</name>
        <description>The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.</description>
        <elementContainer>
          <element elementId="79">
            <name>Extent</name>
            <description>The size or duration of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3754">
                <text>2792</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="50">
            <name>Title</name>
            <description>A name given to the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3755">
                <text>Designing a Translation and Interpretation Diploma Course</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="96">
            <name>Author</name>
            <description>Author</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3756">
                <text>Villalobos Nájera, Luis Armando</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="94">
            <name>Abstract</name>
            <description>A summary of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3757">
                <text>The objective of this paper is to share the experiences regarding the design and implementation of a Translation and Interpretation Diploma Course (TIDC) in a public university located in central Mexico.The main point of designing and implementing the diploma course was to produce a new generation of translators and interpreters, since a number of BA in ELT graduates from local universities,as well as many other translators from the region, wish to grow professionally in both translation and interpretation areas.Moreover, the implementation of this diploma course was necessarybecause no institutions in this region offer a course of this kind. The TIDCwas designed taking into account the demand for professional translators and interpreters derived from the industrial and commercial growth in the state of Aguascalientes, Mexico.    The curriculum for the TIDCconsists of 14 modulescentered on thetheoretical aspects of translation and thetranslation practice of financial, scientific, technical and legal texts. Spanish writing, terminology, and CAT tools training are also part of the curriculum.The students are also introduced to Consecutive and Simultaneous Interpretation using theappropriate interpretation equipment.Allacademic staffinvited to collaborate in this program hold an MA in Translation and Interpretation. They are also certified translators and currently teach translation and interpretation in various universities. Most of them belong to translators and interpreters associations.    Key words: translation theory, translation training, interpretation, syllabus, design, implementation.</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="45">
            <name>Publisher</name>
            <description>An entity responsible for making the resource available</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3758">
                <text>International Burch University</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="40">
            <name>Date</name>
            <description>A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3759">
                <text>2015</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="97">
            <name>Keywords</name>
            <description>Keywords.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3760">
                <text>Article
PeerReviewed</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
        </elementContainer>
      </elementSet>
    </elementSetContainer>
    <tagContainer>
      <tag tagId="71">
        <name>L Education (General),LE Individual institutions (America except United States)</name>
      </tag>
    </tagContainer>
  </item>
  <item itemId="490" public="1" featured="0">
    <fileContainer>
      <file fileId="513">
        <src>https://omeka.ibu.edu.ba/files/original/aa35ba8552d8bb72de17e357748a452a.pdf</src>
        <authentication>3804bc3972309bd6e6ad447ba88b7c16</authentication>
        <elementSetContainer>
          <elementSet elementSetId="4">
            <name>PDF Text</name>
            <description/>
            <elementContainer>
              <element elementId="52">
                <name>Text</name>
                <description/>
                <elementTextContainer>
                  <elementText elementTextId="3769">
                    <text>Journal of Economic and Social Studies

A Review of Service and E-Service Quality Measurements:
Previous Literature and Extension
Emel Kursunluoglu Yarimoglu
Yasar University
Izmir, Turkey
emel.kursunluoglu@yasar.edu.tr
Abstract: The purpose of this study is to show the requirement of
industry-specific national service quality indices for measuring
quality in both traditional and electronic services in various
industries in a country. In this study, the literature about service
and e-service quality measurements was reviewed, and a threedimensional framework was developed. It was found out that the
dimensions of each service quality measurement were all different
from each other due to the different characteristics of the industries
that each study has been conducted in. The study showed that
there is a need for an industry-specific national service quality
index and suggested that national customer satisfaction indices
which have existed in the literature can be a model for industryspecific national service quality indices. An industry-specific
national service quality index enables national companies to
understand their unique industrial characteristics that needed to
be improved continuously in order to increase service quality and
gain competitive advantage. The index which was proposed to
develop in the future was suggested for the first time in this study.

Volume 5 Number 1 Spring 2015

Keywords: Service Quality; E-

Service Quality; Service Quality
Dimensions; National Customer
Satisfaction
Indices;
Turkish
Customer
Satisfaction
Index
(TCSI).

JEL Classification: M31
Article History

Submitted: 11 June 2014
Resubmitted: 3 September 2014
Resubmitted: 17 December 2014
Accepted: 25 December 2014

http://dx.doi.org/10.14706/JECOS
S115110

169

�Emel Kursunluoglu Yarimoglu

Introduction
The techniques of measuring service quality have become a major area in the
marketing literature during the past few decades since the increasing importance of
service industry. The share of service industry in the economy has been increasing for
years. The importance of services has been growing rapidly since the services account
for more than 60 percent of GDP worldwide, almost all economies have a
substantial service sector, and most new job is derived by services (Lovelock and
Wirtz, 2011). Increasing competition in the service industry has led many companies
to consider service quality as a strategic tool. As well as service quality, e-service
quality has been becoming more important nowadays. Measuring e-service quality
was highly developed after 2000s with the increasing usage amount of e-services. The
researches about measuring and improving e-service quality have been continuing
sharply.
Service quality affects customer satisfaction and loyalty which have strong influences
on customer behavior. Since service quality is one of the antecedents of customer
satisfaction (Parasuraman et al., 1988; Boulding et al., 1993; Cronin and Taylor,
1992; Athanassopoulos, 2000) and there are many relations among service quality,
satisfaction, loyalty, perceived value, and behavioral intentions (Leonard and Sasser,
1982; Cronin and Taylor, 1992; Chang and Chen, 1998; Gummesson, 1998;
Silvestro and Cross, 2000; Cabuk et al., 2013), the measurement of service quality
has been a valuable concept that should be analyzed. E-service quality has also
positive impacts on customer satisfaction (Chang and Wang, 2008; Barutcu, 2010;
Liang, 2012). It was shown that e-service quality has a positive effect on satisfaction
and satisfaction has a positive effect on loyalty (Chang et al., 2009). E-service quality
has a significant and positive effect on perceived value; and perceived value increases
the loyalty (Fuentes-Blasco et al., 2010; Pearson et al., 2012). Pearson et al. (2012)
also showed that loyalty intentions can be affected by perceived e-service quality.
There have been many studies that developed scales and dimensions for measuring
service and e-service quality in the literature. This paper reviewed the service and eservice quality measurements and showed the need of an industry-specific national
service quality index for each various service industry in a country. The aim of the
study is to show the requirement of developing industry-specific national service
quality indices. In this study, firstly service and e-service quality scales and their
dimensions were examined, criticisms about service and e-service quality scales were
analyzed, and a three-dimensional framework was developed according to the
170

Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�A Review of Service and E-Service Quality Measurements: Previous Literature and Extension

literature review. This framework showed that each service quality dimensions were
all different from each other due to the different characteristics of the industries that
each study has been conducted in. It was highly suggested that there is a need for an
industry-specific national service quality index and customer satisfaction indices
which have existed in the literature can be a model for industry-specific national
service quality indices. National customer satisfaction indices from different
countries were explained and Turkish Customer Satisfaction Index was focused on.
In conclusion, it was highly recommended to develop an industry-specific national
service quality index since it enables national companies to understand the unique
industrial characteristics that needed to be improved continuously in order to
increase service quality and gain competitive advantage.
Service Quality (SQ) Measurements
Service quality concept was defined by seven service attributes such as security,
consistency, attitude, completeness, condition, availability, and training of service
providers (Sasser et al., 1978). Lehtinen and Lehtinen (1982) defined three
dimensions of service quality such as physical quality, interactive quality, and corporate
quality. Physical quality refers to tangible appearance of the service; interactive
quality relates to the interactions between customers and service personnel; corporate
quality involves the image of service provider.
The first model for measuring service quality was developed by Grönroos in 1984
(Dotchin and Oakland, 1994; Seth et al., 2005; Bulbul and Demirer, 2008). He
developed a service quality model and measured perceived service quality. Technical
quality, functional quality, and corporate image were used in the model as the
dimensions of service quality. Technical quality is about customer evaluations about
the service delivered. Functional quality is seen to be more important dimension
than technical quality. It refers how consumers take the service and it is the
important variable for consumer perceptions and service differentiation. Technical
quality is interested in what was delivered such as the knowledge about product and
services whereas functional quality is interested in how the service was delivered such
as the importance of the service personnel manners. Corporate image has a positive
impact on customer perceptions.
Parasuraman et al. (1985) analyzed the dimensions of service quality and constituted
a GAP model that provides an important framework for defining and measuring
service quality (Saat, 1999). They conducted an exploratory investigation and
Volume 5 Number 1 Spring 2015

171

�Emel Kursunluoglu Yarimoglu

developed the GAP Service Quality Model. It shows the key insights gained through
the executive interviews and focus group interviews about the service quality
concept. The gaps revealed by the executive interviews are shown in the marketer
side (GAP1, GAP2, GAP3, GAP4), and the GAP 5 which was formed by the focus
group interviews is in the consumer side of the model. The GAP names were shown
below (Parasuraman et al., 1985; Lovelock, 2011): The Knowledge Gap (GAP 1):
Customer expectation-management perceptions gap; The Policy Gap (GAP 2):
Management perception-service quality specifications gap; The Delivery Gap (GAP
3): Service quality specifications-service delivery gap; The Communications Gap
(GAP 4): Service delivery-external communications gap; The Service Quality Gap
(GAP 5): Expected service-perceived service gap. Lovelock (1994) added the sixth
gap to the model as The Perceptions Gap between Service Delivery and Perceived
Service.
After the gaps modeling, ten determinants of service quality that consumers used
when interpreting the quality were described (Parasuraman et al., 1985) as follows:
Reliability involves consistency of performance and dependability and provides right
service in right time. Responsiveness includes the willingness or readiness of employees
to provide service. Competence shows skill and knowledge the service personnel.
Access means accessibility and ease of contact. Courtesy involves politeness and
friendliness of service personnel. Communication keeps customer informed, for
example explaining the service and its cost. Credibility contains trustworthiness and
honesty. Security involves physical safety and financial security.
Understanding/Knowing the Customer means learning the customer's specific
requirements and providing them individualized service. Tangibles show the physical
evidence of the service.
Service quality has been conceptualized with different numbers of dimensions and
generally it has been explained with two or three dimensional models. Rust and
Oliver (1994) proposed a three dimensional model which was not tested in a
conceptual way. In this model service quality is a function of service product, service
delivery, and service environment. Hedvall and Paltschik (1991) identified service
quality dimensions as willingness and ability to serve, and physical and psychological
access. Haywood-Farmer (1988) discussed a service quality model including three
basic attributes such as physical facilities, people behavior and conviviality, and
professional judgment. These attributes were related to Parasuraman et al.’s (1985)
service quality determinants. Physical facilities are related to Tangibles; People
Behaviour and Conviviality are related to Reliability, Responsiveness, Access,
172

Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�A Review of Service and E-Service Quality Measurements: Previous Literature and Extension

Courtesy, Communications determinants; and Professional Judgment is related to
Competence, Credibility, Security, Understanding the consumer determinants.
Parasuraman et al. (1988) developed SERVQUAL scale which is an advanced model
for measuring service quality. In SERVQUAL model, there are five dimensions and
22 items presented in seven-point Likert scale. They measured service quality
especially functional service quality via empirical studies in banking, credit card,
repair and maintenance, and long-distance telephone services. The five dimensions
of SERVQUAL are: tangibles, reliability, responsiveness, assurance, and empathy.
Service quality can be measured by a performance-based SERVPERF scale as well as
the gap-based SERVQUAL scale (Cronin and Taylor, 1992). SERVPERF scale was
developed from the same items in SERVQUAL but it has also the performance
statements. Scale consists of items about expectation (22 items-same as
SERVQUAL), performance (22 items-same as SERVQUAL), importance (22 itemssame as SERVQUAL), future purchase behavior (1 item), overall quality (1 item), and
satisfaction (1 item). This study has shown that service quality is measured as an
attitude, the marketing literature supports the performance-based measures, and the
SERVPERF explains more of the variation in service quality than SERVQUAL.
SERVPERF which is a performance-only model for measuring service quality was
developed via empirical studies in the sectors of banking, pest control, dry cleaning,
and fast food. SERVQUAL had a good fit in banking and fast food sectors whereas
SERVPERF had an excellent fit in all four industries.
Dabholkar et al. (1996) developed and empirically validated the multilevel model
called Retail Service Quality Scale (RSQS) in order to measure retail service quality
that consists of five dimensions such as physical aspects, reliability, personal interaction,
problem solving, and policy. The scale has been viewing as a generalized scale to
measure the service quality in retail stores such as department and specialty stores.
Philip and Hazlett (1997) proposed a hierarchical structure model called P-C-P for
measuring service quality in service organizations. The model is based on pivotal,
core, and peripheral attributes. Pivotal attributes which are the most important
attributes that affect service quality are seen as end product or output whereas core
and peripheral attributes are seen as inputs and processes. These attributes are shown
in a triangle. Pivotal attributes are at the top, core attributes are at the second stage,
and peripheral attributes are at the bottom side of the triangle. The degree of
importance decreases from top to bottom of triangle.
Volume 5 Number 1 Spring 2015

173

�Emel Kursunluoglu Yarimoglu

Brady and Cronin (2001) developed a model for measuring service quality.
According to this model; service quality is affected by personal interaction quality,
physical service environment quality, and outcome quality. Attitude, behavior,
expertise form interaction quality; ambient conditions, design, social factors
constitute physical environment quality; and waiting time, tangibles, valence form
outcome quality. Martinez Caro and Martinez Garcia (2007) used this model in
their empirical research for measuring perceived service quality in urgent transport
service industry. They claimed that Brady and Cronin (2001) developed this
hierarchical conceptualized and multidimensional model by combining the Rust and
Oliver model (1994) and Dabholkar et al.’s RSQS hierarchical model (1996).
E-Service Quality (e-SQ) Measurements
E-services are distinguished from traditional services in terms of their characteristics
such as the cost structure of services, the high degree of outsourcing, the rapid
development of new services, the availability of transparent service feedback, and the
continuous improvement of services (Riedl et al., 2009). Because of these
distinguished characteristics between services and e-services, measuring e-service
quality is different from measuring traditional service quality. Before developing eservice quality scales, the research have concentrated on determining three points
such as technical quality of websites, the factors that influence e-satisfaction, and
service quality of websites (Akinci et al., 2009). Hence, the criteria that should be
used for designing an effective website have been the focus points of researchers.
Abels et al. (1999) determined the six criteria that website designers need to use for
designing a successful website: 1) use - easy to use, 2) content - having useful
information, 3) structure - displaying of website, 4) linkage - providing link to the
information at the website and other websites, 5) search - providing search button in
website itself, 6) appearance - being attractive.
Yoo and Donthu (2001) aimed to develop a psychometrically measure of service
quality of online shopping websites and developed SITEQUAL. According to the
model, there are four important factors that affect web site design such as ease of use of website and ability for information search; aesthetic design - the creativity of
website in terms of excellent multimedia and colour graphics; processing speed online processing promptness and interactive responsiveness to consumers’ requests;
and security - of financial and personal information.

174

Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�A Review of Service and E-Service Quality Measurements: Previous Literature and Extension

Loiacono et al. (2002) measured B2C website quality through WebQual™ in the
websites that sell products such as CDs, books and services such as hotel reservations
and airline reservations. It showed that buying and revisiting intentions of consumers
and the value of website. The model has been seen as more suitable for website
designers to design better websites for users rather than measuring service quality
(Zeithaml et al., 2002). WebQual™ has 36 items and 12 constructs. These constructs
are: Informational fit-to-task: finds the information that consumers want; tailored
communications: consumer-website interaction; trust: improves security and privacy
policies; response time: supports communication capacity; ease of understanding:
designs the pages; intuitive operations: develop an intuitive navigation system; visual
appeal: enhances colors, graphics, and text; innovativeness: finds creative approaches;
emotional appeal: is used to gain online customer experience; consistent image: reflects
the image of the company; online completeness: performs over the website; relative
advantage: makes the website easier for interacting.
Barnes and Vidgen (2002) developed WebQual 4.0 to assess the perceived service
quality of online bookstores such as Amazon, BOL, and IBS in UK and found 3
dimensions and 5 subdimensions for measuring e-service quality of websites.
Usability (Usability and Design as subdimensions): appearance, ease of use, ease of
navigation; Information Quality (Information as sub dimension): accuracy, format, and
relevancy of information; Service Interaction Quality: (Trust and Empathy as
subdimensions) transaction/information security, product delivery, personalization
and communication with website.
Zeithaml et al. (2002) showed that a number of studies have examined some criteria
that identified customers’ evaluations about website quality. These are information
availability and content; ease of use; privacy/security; graphic style;
fulfillment/reliability; and other criteria such as access, responsiveness,
personalization. They developed e-SERVQUAL in 2002 for measuring e-service
quality. This model has been conceptualized in two parts: core e-service quality scale
with four dimensions such as efficiency, reliability, fulfillment, privacy; and recovery eservice quality scale with three dimensions such as: responsiveness, compensation,
contact.
Another scale for assessing service quality of e-tailers was developed as PIRQUAL Perceived Internet Retail Quality Model (Francis and White, 2002). The scale
consists of six dimensions such as web store functionality, product attribute description,
ownership conditions, delivery, customer service, and security.
Volume 5 Number 1 Spring 2015

175

�Emel Kursunluoglu Yarimoglu

Wolfinbarger and Gilly (2002) suggested .comQ for the measurement of service
quality delivery through websites. They found that reliability/fulfillment is the
strongest factor that affecting customer satisfaction, website functionality is a strong
factor that affecting loyalty, and customer service is a strong predictive of loyalty and
customer satisfaction. They have developed this valid and reliable scale for the
measurement of etailer quality named eTAilQ (Wolfinbarger and Gilly, 2003).
Service quality of etailers was measured within four factors such as website design,
fulfillment/reliability, privacy/security, customer service. These four factors are shown in
Table 5 and can be defined as follows: Website design includes customer experience
elements such as navigation, information search, order processing, and
personalization. Fulfillment/reliability includes display and description of a product
and right delivery of the product on time. Privacy/security includes information about
customers and credit card payments are secure. Customer service includes being
helpful and responsive towards customer requests.
Santos (2003) proposed e-service quality dimensions that can be classified in two
ways as incubative dimensions and active dimensions. Incubative dimensions
developed before website is launched are ease of use, appearance, linkage, structure and
layout, and content. Active dimensions which can raise customer retention are
developed after launching of a website. They are reliability, efficiency, support,
communication, security, and incentive.
Parasuraman et al. (2005) proposed E-S-QUAL and E-RecS-QUAL scales for
measuring e-service quality. E-S-QUAL is a core service quality scale for measuring
core service attributes of websites and E-RecS-Qual is an e-recovery service quality
scale which measures the quality of recovery services provided by websites. These
scales which adapt to psychometric properties are reliable and valid scales. The E-SQUAL scale has 22 items and four dimensions such as efficiency, fulfillment, system
availability, and privacy. E-RecS-QUAL contains 11 items in three dimensions:
responsiveness, compensation, and contact. E-S-QUAL scale is a leading model for the
measurement of e-service quality just as SERVQUAL in service quality.
Existing e-service quality scales were seen as goal oriented and utilitarian-based by
Bauer et al. (2006). They suggested that utilitarian and hedonic e-service quality
dimensions should be integrated; hence they developed eTransQual scale. It is a
transaction process based approach to integrate utilitarian and hedonic elements in

176

Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�A Review of Service and E-Service Quality Measurements: Previous Literature and Extension

measuring e-service quality. This scale has 25 items and five dimensions such as:
functionality/design, enjoyment, process, reliability, and responsiveness.
E-service quality provided by online travel agencies were investigated by different
researchers such as Park et al., 2007; Kaynama and Black, 2000; Shchiglik and
Barnes, 2004; Chen and Kao, 2010. According to the study of Park et al. (2007), the
dimensions of e-service quality are as follows: ease of use that includes functionality
and accessibility of website and it is the most important item that affects willingness
to buy over the internet, and it is followed by information/content that includes upto-date and reliable information; responsiveness that includes solving customer
problem quickly and on time; fulfillment that includes accuracy of billing, ordering,
online transaction, and services promise; security/privacy that includes to keep
customer personal information, credit card information, and shopping behavior data
safe.
The studies explained about measuring e-service quality above were related to B2C
companies. Since C2C auction websites have been becoming more important as ecommerce business type (Zhang, 2006), a service quality measurement was needed
for C2C auction websites like eBay. Liu et al. (2010) developed a scale called OASQ (online auction service quality). It included 24 items and seven dimensions as:
efficiency, system availability, privacy/security, compensation, personalization, playfulness,
and reputation.
Three-Dimensional Framework on SQ and e-SQ Measurements
Parasuraman et al. (1988) claimed that SERVQUAL measures perceived service
quality in a wide range of service industries. SERVQUAL also has been widely used
in many service industries such as education (Atrek and Bayraktaroglu, 2012; Owlia
and Aspinwall, 1996; Okumus and Duygun, 2008), communication via GSM
operators (Hotamisli and Eleren, 2011), hotels (Akbaba, 2006; Yaprakli and Saglik,
2010), and transportation (Cati and Yildiz, 2005; Aydin and Yildirim, 2012). The
applicability of SERVQUAL to the health care service industry was tested by
Babakus and Mangold (1992). According to them; SERVQUAL is a reliable and
valid scale for measuring functional service quality in hospitals, however hospital
management need to measure both functional and technical quality for a long-term
success.

Volume 5 Number 1 Spring 2015

177

�Emel Kursunluoglu Yarimoglu

On the contrary, Finn and Lamb (1991) did not support that SERVQUAL is valid
for every service industry, thus they suggested that the validity of SERVQUAL in a
variety of service industries should be examined industry by industry (Akbaba,
2006). SERVQUAL dimensions may not fit in every industry which needs its own
quality dimensions. Ekiz and Bavik (2008) also showed that some researchers who
conducted SERVQUAL in different industries confirmed the model (Gabbie and
Neill, 1996; Bojanic and Rosen, 1994; Mehta and Durvasula, 1998; Lam and
Zhang, 1998) whereas some others did not confirm the model (Carman, 1990;
Babakus and Boller, 1992; Brown et al. 1993; Ryan and Cliff, 1996). Carman
(1990) suggested that the requirement of the adaptations of items in SERVQUAL
for each industry. Babakus and Boller (1992) emphasized the requirement of
industry-specific measures of service quality. Brown et al. (1993) found some
problems in SERVQUAL and suggested the requirement of a new method to have
psychometric properties.
SERVPERF another most known and used scale was tested and found as appropriate
for different sectors whereas there were some problems in SERVQUAL. Since the
requirement of industry-specific service quality scale (Babakus and Boller, 1992),
Karatepe et al. (2005) developed an industry-specific (banking) and a countryspecific (Northern Cyprus) model called SQUAL consisting of dimensions as: service
environment, interaction quality, empathy, and reliability. They measured service
quality by using SERVPERF (perceptions-only approach). Besides this, Brady et al.
(2002) also performed a replication and extension of SERVPERF, and they
supported the results of Cronin and Taylor (1992) in different sectors such as
spectator sports, entertainment, health care, long-distance carriers, and fast food.
Also, they claimed that SERVPERF is the superior model among all service quality
models.
As it was explained above, some industry based scales such as SQUAL were derived
by SERVPERF since it was seen as more valid and reliable scale for different service
industries. On the contrary, some of the industry-specific service quality scales were
based on SERVQUAL dimensions such as RENTQUAL (Ekiz and Bavik, 2008) in
car rental services, TISQ (Sangeetha, 2012) in retail banking, SQFS (Chang and
Chelladurai, 2003) in fitness services, DINESERV (Stevens et al., 1995) in
restaurants, SYSTRA-SQ (Aldlaigan and Buttle, 2002) in retail banking, MS-QUAL
(Hosseini et al., 2013) in mobile telecommunication industry, ECOSERV (Khan
and Su, 2003) in ecotourism, and INTSERVQUAL (Frost and Kumar, 2000).
Even though these scale development studies were concentrated on the specific
178

Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�A Review of Service and E-Service Quality Measurements: Previous Literature and Extension

industry, they are inadequate with regard to forming a general industry-specific
national index that measures service quality.
For assessing quality of e-services, E-S-QUAL as a main scale for measuring e-service
quality was adapted to different industries in many studies. It was used in the sectors
such as online shopping (Rafiq et al., 2012; Ingle and Connoly, 2006; Meng and
Mummalaneni, 2010; Türk et al., 2012), and online banking (Marimon et al., 2012;
Akinci et al., 2010). Besides this, there were many researches in the literature about
measuring e-service quality in different industries such as internet banking service
quality (Jun and Cai, 2001; Yang et al., 2004; Ho and Lin, 2010; Jayawardhena,
2004; Siu and Mou, 2005; Zhu et al., 2002; Wu et al., 2012; Kayabasi et al., 2013);
mobile service quality (Ozer et al., 2013; Kuo et al., 2009; Lu et al., 2009); online
shopping (Ilter, 2009; Celik and Basaran, 2008; Li et al., 2012; Seethamraju, 2006).
Assessing of online service quality was analyzed in different sectors with different
scales; however there were no industry-specific national measurements.
After considering the criticisms in the literature about service quality measurements,
a three-dimensional framework was developed and shown in Table 1 below. In the
first part of this framework, the service quality measurements which contain the
main scales such as SERVQUAL and SERVPERF were shown. In the second part,
scale development studies deriving from the main service quality scales with the
techniques of replication or adaptation were shown. Even though they focused on a
specific industry more, they were inadequate of developing an index in national
based. In the third part, e-service quality studies which show the general
development of e-service quality measurements in different industries and countries
were shown.
Table 1: Three-Dimensional Framework on SQ and E-SQ Measurements
SQ Studies
Parasuraman et al.,
1985 GAP Model
Parasuraman et al.,
1988 SERVQUAL
Cronin and Taylor,

Industry-Country

Dimensions
Reliability, Tangibles, Access,
Banking, credit card, securities
Responsiveness, Competence,
brokerage, repair and
Courtesy, Credibility, Security,
maintenance-USA
Communication, Knowing Customers
Banking, credit card, repair
Tangibles, Reliability, Empathy,
and maintenance, telephoneResponsiveness, Assurance
USA
Banking, pest control, dry

Volume 5 Number 1 Spring 2015

Same as SERVQUAL but with

179

�Emel Kursunluoglu Yarimoglu
1992 SERVPERF
Dabholkar et al.,
1996 RSQS
Philip and Hazlett,
1997 PCP Model

Brady and Cronin,
2001 Service Quality

Scale Development
Studies in SQ
Stevens et al.,
1995 DINESERV
Frost and Kumar,
2000
INTSERVQUAL

cleaning, fast food-USA
Department stores-USA
Particular service
organizations-UK
Amusement parks,
restaurants, health and
automobile care facilities,
hair salons, dry cleaning,
jewelry repair, photographUSA

performance only statements
Physical aspects, Reliability, Personal
interaction, Problem solving, Policy
Pivotal, Core, Peripheral attributes

Personal interaction, Service
environment, Outcome

Industry-Country

Dimensions

Restaurants-USA

Reliability, Tangibles, Assurance,
Responsiveness, Empathy

Airline-Australia

Reliability, Tangibles, Assurance,
Responsiveness, Empathy

Aldlaigan and Buttle,
2002 SYSTRA-SQ

Banking-UK

Service system quality, Behavioral
service quality, Service transactional
accuracy, Machine service quality

Khan and Su,
2003 ECOSERV

Ecotourism-USA

Chang and
Chelladurai,
2003 SQFS

Fitness services-USA

Karatepe et al.,
2005 SQUAL
Ekiz and Bavik,
2008 RENTQUAL
Sangeetha,
2012 TISQ

180

Banking-Northern Cyprus
Car rental services-Northern
Cyprus
Banking-Oman

Eco tangibles, Assurance, Reliability,
Responsiveness, Empathy, Tangibles
Service climate, Management
commitment, Programs,
Interpersonal interactions, Task
interactions, Physical environment,
Other clients, Service failures and
recovery, Perceived service quality
Service environment, Interaction
quality, Empathy, Reliability
Comfort, Delivery, Safety, Handing
over, Ergonomics, Accessibility
ATM, Telephone banking, Internet
banking, Call center services, Queue
systems, Price, Core product
Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�A Review of Service and E-Service Quality Measurements: Previous Literature and Extension

Hosseini et al.,
2013 MS-QUAL

Mobile telecommunicationIran

e-SQ Studies
Yoo and Donthu,
2001 SITEQUAL

Industry-Country
Online shopping websitesUSA

Loiacono et al.,
2002 WebQual™

CDs, books, hotel-airline
reservations-USA

Barnes and Vidgen,
2002 WebQual4.0

Bookstores-UK

Zeithaml et al.,
2002 e-SERVQUAL

Online shopping websitesUSA

Network quality, Value-added
service, Pricing plans, Employee
competency, Billing, Customer
services, Service convenience
Dimensions
Ease of use, Aesthetic design,
Processing speed, Security
Informational fit-to-task, Tailored
communications, Trust, Response
time, Ease of understanding,
Intuitive operations, Visual appeal,
Innovativeness, Emotional appeal,
Consistent image, Online
completeness, Relative advantage
Usability, Information quality,
Service interaction quality
Efficiency, Reliability, Fulfillment,
Privacy, Responsiveness,
Compensation, Contact
Web store functionality, Product
attribute description, Ownership
conditions, Delivery, Customer
service, Security
Website design, Fulfillment, Privacy,
Customer service
Ease of use, Appearance, Linkage,
Layout, Content, Reliability,
Efficiency, Support, Incentive,
Communication, Security

Francis and White,
2002 PIRQUAL

Online shopping websitesAustralia

Wolfinbarger and
Gilly, 2003 eTAilQ

Books, CDs and videos-USA

Santos, 2003
E-service quality

Online shopping websitesUK

Parasuraman et al.,
2005 E-S-QUAL

Apparel, books, CDs,
computer software&amp;
hardware, drugs, electronics,
flowers, groceries, toys-USA

Efficiency, Fulfillment, System
availability, Privacy

Parasuraman et al.,
2005 E-RecS-QUAL

Apparel, books, CDs,
computer software&amp;
hardware, drugs, electronics,

Responsiveness, Compensation,
Contact

Volume 5 Number 1 Spring 2015

181

�Emel Kursunluoglu Yarimoglu

Bauer et al.,
2006 eTransQual
Park et al., 2007
Website quality

flowers, groceries, toys-USA
Online shopping websitesGermany
Online travel agencies
(OTA)-USA

Liu et al.,
2010 OA-SQ

C2C auction websitesTaiwan

Functionality, Enjoyment, Process,
Reliability, Responsiveness
Ease of use, Information, Security,
Responsiveness, Fulfillment
Efficiency, System availability,
Security, Compensation, Reputation,
Personalization, Playfulness.

Source: Author’s own work
Following a review of service quality scales, the study proposed a three-dimensional
framework. The dimensions of service quality measurements both in traditional and
electronic environments can be varied in different industries. As it was shown in
Table 1 above, the dimensions of all scales have been changed according to the
various industries in which each study was conducted. It was required to add
different dimensions to the scales to measure service quality in each industry. Since
every service industry has unique characteristics and requires unique dimensions for
measuring service quality, there is a requirement for the industry-specific national
index in assessing of service and e-service quality in different industries in a country.
The discussion in this research is about the need for industry-specific national
indices in measuring both traditional and electronic service quality in different
industries and countries. The industry-specific national service quality indices can be
developed such as the national customer satisfaction indices which were developed to
measure customer satisfaction level in different countries. National customer
satisfaction indices from the literature were shown below as a model example for
developing the industry-specific national service quality index.
National Customer Satisfaction Indices: A Model Example for the Proposed
Index
There has been a requirement for industry-specific national service quality indices
due to the unique characteristics of various industries and the different cultural
environment of countries. Since service quality is one of the components of customer
satisfaction (Ghobadian et al., 1994; McDougall and Levesque, 2000; Demirci Orel
et al., 2012; Chu et al., 2012), there are positive relations between service quality
and customer satisfaction. Because of these relations, national customer satisfaction

182

Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�A Review of Service and E-Service Quality Measurements: Previous Literature and Extension

indices which have existed in the literature can be a model for industry-specific
national service quality indices. Many different countries have developed their
national customer satisfaction indices which help the practitioners to be able to
understand their positions in an industry in terms of customer satisfaction.
The most known and used national customer satisfaction indices are such as: the
Swedish Customer Satisfaction Barometer-SSCB (Fornell, 1992; Anderson et al.,
1994), the American Customer Satisfaction Index-ACSI (Fornell et al., 1996), and
the European Customer Satisfaction Index-ECSI which was developed by the EOQ
(European Organisation for Quality) and EFQM (European Foundation for Quality
Management) and inspired by the SCSB and the ACSI (Kristensen et al., 1999;
Sahin, 2009). Except these indices, there have been many other national customer
satisfaction indices such as the German Customer Barometer (Meyer and Dornach,
1996), the Danish Customer Satisfaction Index (Martensen et al., 2000), the
Norwegian Customer Satisfaction Barometer (Andreassen and Lindestad, 1998), the
Pan-European Customer Satisfaction Index (Eklof and Westlund, 2002), the
Jordanian Customer Satisfaction Index (Al-Nasser et al., 2011), the Mexican User
Satisfaction Index (Calleros et al., 2012), the Chinese Customer Satisfaction Index
(Huang et al.,2011), the Turkish Customer Satisfaction Index (Turkyilmaz and
Ozkan,2007).
The American Customer Satisfaction Index was developed by Fornell et al. in 1996
and measures customer satisfaction level across the United States. The Turkish
Customer Satisfaction Index (TCSI) was developed by KA Research Limited
(KARL) in cooperation with Turkish Society for Quality under the license
agreement with the American Customer Satisfaction Index (KA Research Limited,
2011; Turkyilmaz and Ozkan, 2007; Zaim et al. 2010). The TCSI measures
customer satisfaction in various industries of Turkey.
Industrial Annual Measurement Plan is developed in order to measure customer
satisfaction level of various companies from different industries in the four quarters
of the year. The TCSI Industrial Annual Measurement Plan measures customer
satisfaction levels of companies from these industries (Kalder, 2014): 1st quarter:
LPG gas distributors, mobile phones, GSM operators, credit cards, fast food
restaurants, telecommunication; 2nd quarter: packaged waters, small household
appliances, fruit juices, petrol stations, airlines; 3rd quarter: margarine, liquid oil,
milk and milk products, canned foods, cleaning products, ice cream, meat and
poultry products, personal care; 4th quarter: television as electronic products, white
Volume 5 Number 1 Spring 2015

183

�Emel Kursunluoglu Yarimoglu

goods, personal automobiles, health and automobile insurance, food retailer chains,
cargo companies, consumer banking. The sectoral based rankings according to the
TCSI indices and the industries’ most successful companies between the third
quarter of 2013 and the second quarter of 2014 were shown in Table 2 below.
Table 2: TCSI Ratios According to the Industries and Leading Companies
2013 3rd Quarter
Industry
Margarine:85
Liquid Oil:83
Milk Product:82
Canned food:82
Cleaning Product:82
Ice cream:80
Meat&amp;poultry:78
Personal care:78
2014 1st Quarter
Industry
LPG distributor:82
Mobile phone:76
GSMoperator:73
Credit card:71
Fast food restaurant:71
Telecommunication:70

Company
Unilever
Ana Gıda
Pınar
Tat
P&amp;G
Algida
Erpiliç
Evyap
Company
Aygaz
Iphone
Vodafone
Maximum card
Domino’s Pizza
Türk Telekom

2013 4th Quarter
Industry
Television:82
White Goods:80
Personal automobile:78
Insurance:76
Food retailer chain:76
Cargo company:75
Consumer banking:71

2014 2nd Quarter
Industry
Packaged water:79
Small home appliance:79
Fruit juice:77
Petrol station:77
Airlines:72

Company
Samsung
Arçelik
Volkswagen
Axa insurance
Bim
MNG cargo
Public: Ziraat
Private: İşBankası
Company
Erikli
Beko
Pınar
Opet
Turkish Airlines

Source: compiled from TMME 2013 3rd Q, 2013 4th Q, 2014 1st Q, and 2014 2nd Q.
In the service industry, since services are intangible it is hard to measure quality. The
industry-specific national service quality indices should be formed for each industry
and country similar to these national customer satisfaction indices. The main
difference between national customer satisfaction index and industry-specific
national service quality index is that national customer satisfaction index focuses on
just one country and it does not have any different dimensions for different
industries. It eliminates the diversities among industries. But industry-specific
national service quality index should have different dimensions for each unique
industry. Otherwise, it would become just national service quality index, not
industry-specific national service quality index.

184

Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�A Review of Service and E-Service Quality Measurements: Previous Literature and Extension

Conclusion
The importance of service quality is already well known (Lewis and Booms, 1983;
Grönroos, 1984; Parasuraman et al., 1985; Mangold and Babakus, 1990). In the
emerging service industry, it is important to measure the service quality. The first
finding of this study was the requirement of an industry-specific service quality
index. Since SERVQUAL was not valid for every industry, it was suggested that the
validity of SERVQUAL should be examined in a variety of service industries and the
adaptations of items in SERVQUAL for each industry should be organized (Finn
and Lamb, 1991; Carman, 1990; Babakus and Boller, 1992; Brown et al. 1993;
Ryan and Cliff, 1996). Moreover, Babakus and Boller (1992) emphasized the
requirement of industry-specific measures of service quality. In order to measure
service quality effectively in different industries, an industry-specific service quality
index should be developed since every industry has its different unique
characteristics. For example, the dimensions that measure the supermarket service
quality can be differed from the dimensions of service quality in car washing services
or health care services. The measurement of service quality in the retail industry
requires different scales since retail stores offer products and significant services
together. The Retail Service Quality Scale was developed to measure the service
quality in retailers. However, this scale is not sufficient for an industry based index.
This scale should be diversified for various retail types such as a scale for department
stores and another scale for supermarkets since department stores and supermarkets
offer different level of service due to their natures. Because of the differences among
the characteristics of each industry, it was highly suggested developing an industryspecific service quality index in this research.
The second finding of this study was the requirement of national service quality
index. Service quality can be differentiated in different countries since countries’
cultures affect customers’ perceptions on quality (Laroche et al., 2004). For example,
researchers from different countries (Siu and Cheung, 2001; Nakip et al., 2006;
Celik; 2011) have investigated service quality in retailers for years and the results
showed that there was significant differences on quality perceptions. Furrer et al.
(2000) argued that perceptions of service quality varied across cultural groups and
proposed Cultural Service Quality Index by testing SERVQUAL dimensions
correlated with Hofstede’s cultural dimensions (1980, 1991). Because of these
developments that show the importance of cultural differences, it was highly
suggested developing a national service quality index in this research.

Volume 5 Number 1 Spring 2015

185

�Emel Kursunluoglu Yarimoglu

The main comprehensive result of this study was that a service quality index that
consists of both industry-specific and national dimensions should be developed
based on every different industry in a country since the unique characteristics of
these industries and cultural differences among countries. This review study
suggested that there is a general need for developing an industry-specific national
service quality index to be able to measure the unique service quality dimensions in
each industry. The index which was proposed to develop in the future was suggested
for the first time in this study.
Another result was that the national customer satisfaction indices which have existed
in the literature have been recommended as a model example for industry-specific
national service quality indices. After defining the problem with the help of the
literature review, national customer satisfaction indices were proposed as a solution
of the problem. Because of the close relations between service quality and customer
satisfaction, national customer satisfaction models can be taken as a fundamental
basis for developing industry-specific national service quality index. In the case of
taking the national customer satisfaction models as a basis for industry-specific
national service quality index, it would be helpful to show the relations between the
models.
The measurements at the second part of Table 1 called Scale Development Studies
in SQ are the most suitable examples for industry-specific national service quality
index since they focused on a specific industry in a country such as car rental services
(RENTQUAL) in Northern Cyprus, restaurant services (DINESERV) in USA, and
fitness center services (SQFS) in USA. However these measurements focused on a
specific industry in a country, they were inadequate in forming an industry-specific
national service quality index. They need to be improved in terms of creating
industry-specific national service quality index.
Developing an industry-specific national service quality index helps service
companies to find their unique industrial characteristics that should be improved
continuously in order to increase the service quality and serve the customers better.
E-service quality is an essential strategy for online retailers, and more important than
low price and web presence (Zeithaml et al., 2002). In order to develop e-service
quality, industry-specific national e-service quality index should be created.
Discovering the main dimensions that increase the service quality of online
companies enables them to gain competitive advantage in forming the websites and
offerings.
186

Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�A Review of Service and E-Service Quality Measurements: Previous Literature and Extension

Limitation and Further Research Directions
The limitation of the study was that the only limited numbers of studies (6 service
quality measurement studies, 9 replication or adaptation studies in service quality,
and 12 e-service quality measurement studies) from the literature could be reviewed
and grouped into three dimensions. Three-dimensional framework that analyzed the
service quality measurement studies into three groups according to industry,
country, and dimensions should be improved in further studies. Moreover, the
empirical studies on industry-specific national service quality index need to be
implemented in future researches. The dimensions of each service industry should be
classified and tested in terms of reliability and validity.
References
Abels, E. G., White, M. D. &amp; Hahn, K. (1999). A user-based design process for
Web sites. OCLC Systems &amp; Services, 15 (1), 35-44.
Akbaba, A. (2006). Measuring service quality in the hotel industry: a study in a
business hotel in Turkey. Hospitality Management, 25, 170–192.
Akinci, S., Inan, E. A., Aksoy, S. &amp; Buyukkupcu, A. (2009). Pazarlama
literatüründe hizmet kalitesi kavramının dünü ve bugünü. Hacettepe Üniversitesi
İİBF Dergisi, 27 (2), 61-82.
Akinci, S., Atilgan-Inan, E. &amp; Aksoy, S. (2010). Re-assessment of ES-Qual and ERecS-Qual in a pure service setting. Journal of Business Research, 63 (3), 232-240.
Al-Nasser, A. D., Al-Rawwash, M. Y. &amp; Alakhras, A. S. (2011). An approach to
setting up a national customer satisfaction index: the Jordan case study. Journal of
Applied Statistics, 38 (9), 1977-1993.
Aldlaigan, A. H. &amp; Buttle, F. A. (2002). SYSTRA-SQ: A new measure of bank
service quality. International Journal of Service Industry Management, 13 (4), 362381.

Volume 5 Number 1 Spring 2015

187

�Emel Kursunluoglu Yarimoglu

Anderson, E. W., Fornell, C. &amp; Lehmann, D. R. (1994). Customer satisfaction,
market share, and profitability: findings from Sweden. Journal of Marketing, 58, 5366.
Andreassen, T. W. &amp; Lindestad, B. (1998). Customer loyalty and complex services:
the impact of corporate image on quality, customer satisfaction and loyalty for
customers with varying degrees of service expertise. International Journal of Service
Industry Management, 9 (1), 7-23.
Athanassopoulos, A. D. (2000). Customer satisfaction cues to support market
segmentation and explain switching behavior. Journal of Business Research, 47, 191207.
Atrek, B. &amp; Bayraktaroglu, G. (2012). Is there a need to develop a separate service
quality scale for every service sector? Verification of SERVQUAL in higher
education services. Suleyman Demirel University The Journal of Faculty of Economics
and Administrative Sciences, 17 (1), 423-440.
Aydin, K. &amp; Yildirim, S. (2012). The measurement of service quality with
SERVQUAL for different domestic airline firms in Turkey. Serbian Journal of
Management, 7(2), 219-230.
Babakus, E. &amp; Boller, G. W. (1992). An empirical assessment of the SERVQUAL
scale. Journal of Business Research, 24(3), 253-268.
Babakus, E. &amp; Mangold, W. G. (1992).Adapting the SERVQUAL scale to hospital
services: an empirical investigation. HSR: Health Services Research, 26(6), 767.
Barnes, S. J. &amp; Vidgen, R. T. (2002). An integrative approach to the assessment of
e-commerce quality. Journal of Electronic Commerce Research, 3(3), 114-127.
Barutcu, S. (2010). E-customer satisfaction in the e-tailing industry: an empirical
survey for Turkish e-customers. Ege Academic Review, 10(1), 15-35.
Bauer, H. H., Falk, T. &amp; Hammerschmidt, M. (2006). eTransQual: A transaction
process-based approach for capturing service quality in online shopping. Journal of
Business Research, 59(7), 866-875.

188

Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�A Review of Service and E-Service Quality Measurements: Previous Literature and Extension

Bojanic D. C. &amp; Rosen, L. D. (1994). Measuring service quality in restaurants: An
application of the SERVQUAL instrument. Journal of Hospitality and Tourism
Research, 18(1), 3-14.
Boulding, W., Kalra, A., Staelin, R. &amp; Zeithaml, V. A. (1993). A dynamic process
model of service quality: from expectations to behavioural intentions. Journal of
Marketing Research, 30, 7-27.
Brady, M. K. &amp; Cronin Jr, J. J. (2001). Some new thoughts on conceptualizing
perceived service quality: a hierarchical approach. Journal of Marketing, 65(3), 34-49.
Brady, M. K., Cronin, J. J. &amp; Brand, R. R. (2002). Performance-only measurement
of service quality: a replication and extension. Journal of Business Research, 55, 17-31.
Brown, T. J., Churchill Jr, G. A. &amp; Peter, J. P. (1993). Improving the measurement
of service quality. Journal of Retailing, 69(1), 127-139.
Bulbul, H. &amp; Demirer, O. (2008). Hizmet kalitesi ölçüm modelleri SERVQUAL ve
SERPERF’in karşılaştırmalı analizi. Selçuk Üniversitesi SBE Dergisi, 20, 181-198.
Cabuk, S., Nakiboglu, B. &amp; Canoglu, M. (2013). Algılanan otel imaji ve hizmet
kalitesi ile tekrar satin alma niyeti arasindaki ilişkiler. Anatolia: Turizm Araştırmaları
Dergisi, 24(1), 96-108.
Calleros, O., Rivera, H., Serrato, H., Delgado, M., Leon, C., Acevedo, A. &amp;
Ramirez, I. (2012). Development of the Mexican user satisfaction index (IMSU) to
evaluate social government programs in Mexico: the case of the daycare social
program. Journal of Consumer Satisfaction, Dissatisfaction and Complaining Behavior,
25, 118-129.
Carman, J. M. (1990). Consumer perceptions of service quality: An assessment of
the SERVQUAL dimensions. Journal of Retailing, 66(1), 33-55.
Cati, K. &amp; Yildiz, S. (2005). Şehirlerarası Otobüs İşletmelerinde Hizmet Kalitesinin
Ölçülmesi ve Bir Uygulama. Hacettepe Üniversitesi İİBF Dergisi, 23(2), 121-144.

Volume 5 Number 1 Spring 2015

189

�Emel Kursunluoglu Yarimoglu

Celik, H. &amp; Basaran, B. (2008). Bireysel müşteriler tarafından algılanan elektronik
hizmet kalitesi. Anadolu University Journal of Social Sciences, 8(2).
Celik, H. (2011). Alışveriş merkezlerinde hizmet kalitesi algısı ve bir araştırma.
Süleyman Demirel Üniversitesi İktisadi ve İdari Bilimler Fakültesi Dergisi, 16(3), 433448.
Chang, T. Z. &amp; Chen, S. J. (1998). Market orientation, service quality and business
profitability: a conceptual model and empirical evidence. Journal of Services
Marketing, 12(4), 246-264.
Chang, K. &amp; Chelladurai, P. (2003). System-based quality dimensions in fitness
services: development of the scale of quality. The Service Industries Journal, 23(5),
65-83.
Chang, H. H. &amp; Wang, H. W. (2008). The relationships among e-service quality,
value, satisfaction and loyalty in online shopping. European Advances in Consumer
Research, 8(1), 10-14.
Chang, H. H., Wang, Y. H. &amp; Yang, W. Y. (2009). The impact of e-service quality,
customer satisfaction and loyalty on e-marketing: Moderating effect of perceived
value. Total Quality Management, 20(4), 423-443.
Chen, C. F. &amp; Kao, Y. L. (2010). Relationships between process quality, outcome
quality, satisfaction, and behavioural intentions for online travel agencies-evidence
from Taiwan. The Service Industries Journal, 30(12), 2081-2092.
Chu, P. Y., Lee, G. Y. &amp; Chao, Y. (2012). Service quality, customer satisfaction,
customer trust, and loyalty in an e-banking context. Social Behavior and Personality:
An International Journal, 40(8), 1271-1283.
Cronin, J. J. &amp; Taylor, S. A. (1992). Measuring service quality: a reexamination and
extension. Journal of Marketing, 56, 55-68.
Dabholkar, P. A., Thorpe, D. I. &amp; Rentz, J. O. (1996). A measure of service quality
for retail stores: scale development and validation. Journal of the Academy of
Marketing Science, 24(1), 3-16.

190

Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�A Review of Service and E-Service Quality Measurements: Previous Literature and Extension

Demirci Orel, F., Nakiboglu, G. &amp; Oygur, L. (2012). Lojistik hizmetlerde algılanan
hizmet kalitesi boyutlarının müşteri tatmini üzerindeki etkileri. Finans Politik ve
Ekonomik Yorumlar, 49(563), 41-57.
Dotchin, J. A. &amp; Oakland, J. S. (1994). Total quality management in services.
International Journal of Quality &amp; Reliability Management, 11(3), 27-42.
Ekiz, E. H. &amp; Bavik, A. (2008). Scale development process: service quality in car
rental services. Electronic Journal of Business Research Methods, 6(2).
Eklof, J. and Westlund, A.H. (2002). The Pan European customer satisfaction index
program. Total Quality Management, 13(8), 1099-1106.
Finn, D. W. &amp; Lamb Jr, C. W. (1991). An evaluation of the SERVQUAL Scales in
a retailing setting. Advances in Consumer Research, 18(1), 483-490.
Fornell, C. (1992). A national customer satisfaction barometer: the Swedish
experience. Journal of Marketing, 56, 6-21.
Fornell, C., Johnson, M.D., Anderson, E.W., Cha, J. &amp; Bryant, B.E. (1996).The
American customer satisfaction index: nature, purpose, and findings. Journal of
Marketing, 60, 7-18.
Francis, J. E. &amp; White, L. (2002). PIRQUAL: a scale for measuring customer
expectations and perceptions of quality in internet retailing. In Proceedings of the
2002 American Marketing Association winter educators’ conference: marketing
theory and applications, 13, 263-70.
Frost, F. A. &amp; Kumar, M. (2000). INTSERVQUAL–an internal adaptation of the
GAP model in a large service organisation. Journal of Services Marketing, 14(5), 358377.
Fuentes-Blasco, M., Saura, I. G., Berenguer-Contrí, G. &amp; Moliner-Velázquez, B.
(2010). Measuring the antecedents of e-loyalty and the effect of switching costs on
website. The Service Industries Journal, 30(11), 1837-1852.

Volume 5 Number 1 Spring 2015

191

�Emel Kursunluoglu Yarimoglu

Furrer, O., Liu, B. S. C., &amp; Sudharshan, D. (2000). The relationships between
culture and service quality perceptions basis for cross-cultural market segmentation
and resource allocation. Journal of Service Research, 2(4), 355-371.
Gabbie, O. &amp; Neill, M. A. (1996). SERVQUAL and Northern Ireland hotel sector:
a comparative analysis - part 1. Managing Service Quality, 8(5), 306-311.
Ghobadian, A., Speller, S. &amp; Jones, M. (1994). Service quality: concepts and
models. International Journal of Quality &amp; Reliability Management, 11(9), 43-66.
Grönroos, C. (1984). A service quality model and its marketing implications.
European Journal of Marketing, 18(4), 36-44.
Gummesson, E. (1998). Productivity, quality and relationship marketing in service
operations. International Journal of Contemporary Hospitality Management, 10(1), 415.
Haywood-Farmer, J. (1988). A conceptual model of service quality. International
Journal of Operations &amp; Production Management, 8(6), 19-29.
Hedvall, M. B. &amp; Paltschik, M. (1991). Intrinsic service quality determinants for
pharmacy customers. International Journal of Service Industry Management, 2(2), 3848.
Ho, C. T. B. &amp; Lin, W. C. (2010). Measuring the service quality of internet
banking: scale development and validation. European Business Review, 22(1), 5-24.
Hofstede, Geert (1980). Culture’s Consequences: International Differences in WorkRelated Values. Beverly Hills, CA: Sage.
Hofstede, Geert (1991). Cultures and Organizations: Software of the Mind. London:
McGraw-Hill.
Hosseini, S. Y., Zadeh, M. B. &amp; Bideh, A. Z. (2013). Providing a multidimensional
measurement model for assessing mobile telecommunication service quality (MSQual). Iranian Journal of Management Studies, 6(2), 7-29.

192

Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�A Review of Service and E-Service Quality Measurements: Previous Literature and Extension

Hotamisli, M. &amp; Eleren, A. (2011). GSM operatörlerinde hizmet kalitesinin
SERVQUAL ölçeği ile ölçülmesi: Afyonkarahisar örneği, ZKÜ SBE Dergisi, 7(13),
221-238.
Huang, J.,Wang, X. &amp; Chen, R. (2011). Regional differences in customer
satisfaction in China. Social Behavior and Personality, 39(10), 1403-1412.
Ilter, B. (2009). E-perakendecilikde e-hizmet kalitesi, müşteri memnuniyeti ve
müşteri sadakati ilişkisi: İşletme fakültesi öğrencileri üzerine bir araştırma. İşletme
Fakültesi Dergisi, 10(1), 97-117.
Ingle, S. &amp; Connolly, R. (2006). Methodological and research issues using ESQUAL to measure online service quality in Irish SMEs. Irish Journal of Management,
27(2).
Jayawardhena, C. (2004). Measurement of service quality in internet banking: the
development of an instrument. Journal of Marketing Management, 20(1-2), 185-207.
Jun, M. &amp; Cai, S. (2001). The key determinants of internet banking service quality:
a content analysis. International Journal of Bank Marketing, 19(7), 276-291.
KA Research Limited. (2011). A national measure of quality and satisfaction,
Retrieved from: http://www.ka.com.tr/TMME.aspx?BI=fragment-1
Kalder. (2014). TMME çalışma ve uygulama programı, Retrieved from:
http://www.kalder.org/kalderhakkinda.aspx?id=785
Karatepe, O. M., Yavas, U. &amp; Babakus, E. (2005). Measuring service quality of
banks: scale development and validation. Journal of Retailing and Consumer
Services, 12(5), 373-383.
Kayabasi, A., Celik, B. &amp; Buyukarslan, A. (2013). The analysis of the relationship
among perceived electronic service quality, total service quality and total satisfaction
in banking sector. International Journal of Human Sciences, 10(2), 304-325.
Kaynama, S. &amp; Black, C. (2000). A proposal to assess the service quality of online
travel agencies: An exploratory study. Journal of Professional Service Marketing, 21(1),
63-88.
Volume 5 Number 1 Spring 2015

193

�Emel Kursunluoglu Yarimoglu

Khan, M. M., &amp; Su, K. D. (2003). Service quality expectations of travellers visiting
Cheju Island in Korea. Journal of Ecotourism, 2(2), 114-125.
Kristensen, K., Martensen, A. &amp; Gronholdt, L. (1999). Measuring the impact of
buying behaviour on customer satisfaction. Total Quality Management, 10(4-5), 602614.
Kuo, Y. F., Wu, C. M. &amp; Deng, W. J. (2009). The relationships among service
quality, perceived value, customer satisfaction, and post-purchase intention in
mobile value-added services. Computers in Human Behavior, 25(4), 887-896.
Laroche, M., Ueltschy, L. C., Abe, S., Cleveland, M. &amp; Yannopoulos, P. P. (2004).
Service quality perceptions and customer satisfaction: evaluating the role of
culture. Journal of International Marketing, 12(3), 58-85.
Lam, T. &amp; Zang, H. Q. (1998). Service quality of travel agents: the case of travel
agents in Hong Kong. Journal of Tourism Management, 20(3), 341-349.
Lehtinen, U. &amp; Lehtinen, J. R. (1982). Service quality: a study of quality
dimensions. Helsinki: Service Management Institute, Unpublished working paper,
Finland OY.
Leonard, F. S. &amp; Sasser, W. E. (1982). The incline of quality. Harvard Business
Review, 60 (5): 163-71.
Lewis, R. C. &amp; Booms, B. H. (1983). The marketing aspects of service quality.
Emerging Perspectives on Services Marketing, 65(4), 99-107.
Li, Y. L., Si, H. X. &amp; Zhao, X. H. (2012). The Impact of Online Shopping Service
Quality on Customer Loyalty in Emerging Economies: The Case of Chinese
Customers. Proceedings of International Joint Conference on Service Sciences, 152-157.
Liang, Y. H. (2012). Exploring the relationship between perceived electronic service
quality, satisfaction, and personality: a study of Taiwan's online game industry. Total
Quality Management &amp; Business Excellence, 23(7-8), 949-963.

194

Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�A Review of Service and E-Service Quality Measurements: Previous Literature and Extension

Liu, C. T., Guo, Y. M. &amp; Hsieh, T. Y. (2010). Measuring user perceived service
quality of online auction sites. The Service Industries Journal, 30(7), 1177-1197.
Loiacono, E. T., Watson, R. T. &amp; Goodhue, D. L. (2002). WEBQUAL: A measure
of website quality. Marketing Theory and Applications, 13(3), 432-438.
Lovelock, C. (1994). Product Plus. New York: McGraw Hill.
Lovelock, C. &amp; Wirtz, J. (2011). Services Marketing. New Jersey: Pearson.
Lu, Y., Zhang, L. &amp; Wang, B. (2009). A multidimensional and hierarchical model
of mobile service quality. Electronic Commerce Research and Applications, 8(5), 228240.
Mangold, W. G. &amp; Babakus, E. (1990). Monitoring service quality. Review of
Business, 11(4), 21-27.
Marimon, F., Petnji Yaya, L. H. &amp; Casadesus Fa, M. (2012). Impact of e-Quality
and service recovery on loyalty: A study of e-banking in Spain. Total Quality
Management &amp; Business Excellence, 23(7-8), 769-787.
Martensen, A., Gronholdt, L. &amp; Kristensen, K. (2000). The drivers of customer
satisfaction and loyalty: cross-industry findings from Denmark. Total Quality
Management, 11(4-6), 544-553.
Martinez Caro, L. &amp; Martinez Garcia, J. A. (2007). Measuring perceived service
quality in urgent transport service. Journal of Retailing and Consumer Services, 14(1),
60-72.
McDougall, G. H. &amp; Levesque, T. (2000). Customer satisfaction with services:
putting perceived value into the equation. Journal of Services Marketing, 14(5), 392410.
Mehta, S. C. &amp; Durvasula, S. (1998), Relationship between SERVQUAL
dimensions and organizational performance in the case of a business-to-business
service. Journal of Business and Industrial Marketing, 13(1), 40-53.

Volume 5 Number 1 Spring 2015

195

�Emel Kursunluoglu Yarimoglu

Meng, J. &amp; Mummalaneni, V. (2010). Measurement equivalency of web service
quality instruments: A test on Chinese and African American consumers. Journal of
International Consumer Marketing, 22(3), 259-269.
Meyer, A. &amp; Dornach, F. (1996), The German Customer Barometer: Quality and
Satisfaction-Yearbook of Customer Satisfaction in German, German Marketing
Association and German Post AG, Dusseldorf.
Nakip, M., Varinli, I. &amp; Gullu, K. (2006). Süpermarketlerde çalışanların ve
tüketicilerin hizmet kalitesi beklentilerinin ve algılamalarının karşılaştırılmasına
yönelik bir araştırma. Atatürk Üniversitesi İktisadi ve İdari Bilimler Dergisi, 20(2),
373-386.
Okumus, A. &amp; Duygun, A. (2008). Eğitim hizmetlerinin pazarlanmasında hizmet
kalitesinin ölçümü ve algılanan hizmet kalitesi ile öğrenci memnuniyeti arasındaki
ilişki. Anadolu Üniversitesi Sosyal Bilimler Dergisi, 8(2), 17-38.
Owlia, M. S. &amp; Aspinwall, E. M. (1996). A framework for the dimensions of quality
in higher education. Quality Assurance in Education, 4(2), 12-20.
Ozer, A., Argan, M. T. &amp; Argan, M. (2013). The effect of mobile service quality
dimensions on customer satisfaction. Procedia-Social and Behavioral Sciences, 99,
428-438.
Park, Y. A., Gretzel, U. &amp; Sirakaya-Turk, E. (2007). Measuring web site quality for
online travel agencies. Journal of Travel &amp; Tourism Marketing, 23(1), 15-30.
Parasuraman, A., Zeithaml, V. A. &amp; Berry, L. L. (1985). A conceptual model of
service quality and its implications for future research. The Journal of Marketing,
49(4), 41-50.
Parasuraman, A., Zeithaml, V. A. &amp; Berry, L. L. (1988). SERVQUAL: a multipleitem scale for measuring consumer perceptions of service quality. Journal of Retailing.
64(1),12-40.
Parasuraman, A., Zeithaml, V. A. &amp; Malhotra, A. (2005). ES-QUAL a multipleitem scale for assessing electronic service quality. Journal of Service Research, 7(3),
213-233.
196

Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�A Review of Service and E-Service Quality Measurements: Previous Literature and Extension

Pearson, A., Tadisina, S. &amp; Griffin, C. (2012). The role of e-service quality and
information quality in creating perceived value: antecedents to web site
loyalty. Information Systems Management, 29(3), 201-215.
Philip, G. &amp; Hazlett, S. A. (1997). The measurement of service quality: a new PCP
attributes model. International Journal of Quality &amp; Reliability Management, 14(3),
260-286.
Rafiq, M., Lu, X. &amp; Fulford, H. (2012).Measuring Internet retail service quality
using E-S-QUAL. Journal of Marketing Management, 28(9-10), 1159-1173.
Riedl, C., Leimeister, J. M. &amp; Krcmar, H. (2009). New service development for
electronic services: A literature review. Proceedings of the Fifteenth Americas
Conference on Information Systems (AMCIS), San Francisco.
Rust, R. T. &amp; Oliver, R. L. (1994). Service quality: insights and managerial
implications from the frontier in R. T. Rust and R. L. Oliver (eds.) Service Quality:
New Directions in Theory and Practice: 1-19. California: Sage.
Ryan, C., &amp; A. Cliff (1996). Users and non-users on the expectation item of the
SERVQUAL scale. Annals of Tourism Research, 23(4), 931-934.
Saat, M. (1999). Kavramsal hizmet modeli ve hizmet kalitesini ölçme aracı olarak
SERVQUAL analizi. Gazi Üniversitesi İİBF Dergisi, 3(99), 107-118.
Sahin, A. (2009). A comparison of the Turkish Customer Satisfaction Index with the
American Customer Satisfaction Index in the food manufacturing industry. 5th
International Conference on Business, Management and Economics, CesmeIzmir/Turkey, October 22-24, 2009, Proceedings Book I, 44-55.
Sangeetha, J. (2012). Development of a service quality scale for multiple technology
interfaces in commercial banking. Journal of Internet Banking &amp; Commerce, 17(3).
Santos, J. (2003). E-service quality: a model of virtual service quality dimensions.
Managing Service Quality, 13(3), 233-246.

Volume 5 Number 1 Spring 2015

197

�Emel Kursunluoglu Yarimoglu

Sasser, W. E., Olsen, R. P. &amp; Wyckoff, D. D. (1978). Management of Service
Operations. Boston: Allyn &amp; Bacon.
Seethamraju, R. (2006). Web quality – a study of user perceptions. IIMB
Management Review, 18, 15-24.
Seth, N., Deshmukh, S. G., &amp; Vrat, P. (2005). Service quality models: a review.
International Journal of Quality &amp; Reliability Management, 22(9), 913-949.
Shchiglik, C. &amp; Barnes, S. J. (2004). Evaluating web site quality in the airline
industry. Journal of Computer Information Systems, 44(3), 17-25.
Silvestro, R. &amp; Cross, S. (2000). Applying service profit chain in a retail
environment. International Journal of Service Industry Management, 11(3), 244-268.
Siu, N. Y. &amp; Cheung, J. T. H. (2001). A measure of retail service quality. Marketing
Intelligence &amp; Planning, 19(2), 88-96.
Siu, N. Y. M. &amp; Mou, J. C. W. (2005). Measuring service quality in internet
banking: the case of Hong Kong. Journal of International Consumer Marketing,
17(4), 99-116.
Stevens, P., Knutson, B. &amp; Patton, M. (1995). DINESERV: a tool for measuring
service quality in restaurants. The Cornell Hotel and Restaurant Administration
Quarterly, 36(2), 5-60.
TMME 2013 3rd Quarter. (2013, December 25). Kalder. Retrieved from:
http://www.kalder.org/images/Haber_resim/6edbeff0d2cd497bb7b486f8ee8714ca.p
df
TMME 2013 4th Quarter. (2013, April 8). Kalder. Retrieved from:
http://www.kalder.org/images/Haber_resim/9b316c042d464efd923c120bed0f48d1.
pdf
TMME 2014 1st Quarter. (2014, July 7). Kalder. Retrieved from:
http://www.kalder.org/images/Haber_resim/67a3c90a02244f4185b3e797ab3b11c6.
pdf

198

Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�A Review of Service and E-Service Quality Measurements: Previous Literature and Extension

TMME 2014 2nd Quarter. (2014, September 15). Kalder. Retrieved from:
http://www.kalder.org/images/Haber_resim/39d340af35a048398a009df321256777.
pdf
Turkyilmaz, A. &amp; Ozkan, C. (2007). Development of a customer satisfaction index
model: An application to the Turkish mobile phone sector. Industrial Management
and Data Systems, 107(5), 672-687.
Türk, B., Scholz, M. &amp; Berresheim, P. (2012). Measuring service quality in online
luxury goods retailing. Journal of Electronic Commerce Research, 13(1), 88-103.
Wolfinbarger, M. &amp; Gilly, F. M, C. (2002). .comQ: dimensionalizing, measuring
and predicting quality of the e-tail experience. Marketing Science Institute, Working
Paper No. 02- 100, Cambridge, MA.
Wolfinbarger, M. &amp; Gilly, M. C. (2003). eTailQ: Dimensionalizing, measuring and
predicting etail quality. Journal of Retailing, 79(3), 183-198.
Wu, Y. L., Tao, Y. H. &amp; Yang, P. C. (2012). Learning from the past and present:
measuring Internet banking service quality. The Service Industries Journal, 32(3),
477-497.
Yang, Z., Jun, M. &amp; Peterson, R. T. (2004). Measuring customer perceived online
service quality: scale development and managerial implications. International Journal
of Operations &amp; Production Management, 24(11), 1149-1174.
Yaprakli, S. &amp;Saglik, E. (2010). Hizmet işletmelerinde rekabet aracı olarak hizmet
kalitesi ve ilişki kalitesi: konaklama işletmelerinde bir uygulama. Marmara
Üniversitesi Öneri Dergisi, 9 (34), 71-85.
Yoo, B. &amp; Donthu, N. (2001). Developing a scale to measure the perceived quality
of an Internet shopping site (SITEQUAL). Quarterly Journal of Electronic Commerce,
2(1), 31-45.
Zaim, S., Turkyilmaz, A., Tarim, M., Ucar, B. &amp; Akkas, O. (2010). Measuring
customer satisfaction in Turk Telekom Company using structural equation
modeling technique. Journal of Global Strategic Management, 4(1): 89-98.

Volume 5 Number 1 Spring 2015

199

�Emel Kursunluoglu Yarimoglu

Zeithaml, V. A., Parasuraman, A. &amp; Malhotra, A. (2002). Service quality delivery
through web sites: a critical review of extant knowledge. Journal of the Academy of
Marketing Science, 30(4), 362-375.
Zhang, J. (2006). The roles of players and reputation: Evidence from eBay online
auctions. Decision Support Systems, 42(3), 1800-1818.
Zhu, F. X., Wymer, W. &amp; Chen, I. (2002). IT-based services and service quality in
consumer banking. International Journal of Service Industry Management, 13(1), 6990.

200

Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�</text>
                  </elementText>
                </elementTextContainer>
              </element>
            </elementContainer>
          </elementSet>
        </elementSetContainer>
      </file>
    </fileContainer>
    <elementSetContainer>
      <elementSet elementSetId="1">
        <name>Dublin Core</name>
        <description>The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.</description>
        <elementContainer>
          <element elementId="79">
            <name>Extent</name>
            <description>The size or duration of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3762">
                <text>2837</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="50">
            <name>Title</name>
            <description>A name given to the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3763">
                <text>A Review of Service and E-Service Quality Measurements:   Previous Literature and Extension</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="96">
            <name>Author</name>
            <description>Author</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3764">
                <text>Yarimoglu Kursunluoglu, Emel</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="94">
            <name>Abstract</name>
            <description>A summary of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3765">
                <text>Abstract: The purpose of this study is to show the requirement of industry-specific national service quality indices for measuring quality in both traditional and electronic services in various industries in a country. In this study, the literature about service and e-service quality measurements was reviewed, and a three-dimensional framework was developed. It was found out that the dimensions of each service quality measurement were all different from each other due to the different characteristics of the industries that each study has been conducted in. The study showed that there is a need for an industry-specific national service quality index and suggested that national customer satisfaction indices which have existed in the literature can be a model for industry-specific national service quality indices. An industry-specific national service quality index enables national companies to understand their unique industrial characteristics that needed to be improved continuously in order to increase service quality and gain competitive advantage. The index which was proposed to develop in the future was suggested for the first time in this study.    Keywords: Service quality; E-service quality; Service quality dimensions; National customer satisfaction indices; Turkish Customer Satisfaction Index (TCSI).</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="45">
            <name>Publisher</name>
            <description>An entity responsible for making the resource available</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3766">
                <text>International Burch University</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="40">
            <name>Date</name>
            <description>A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3767">
                <text>2015</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="97">
            <name>Keywords</name>
            <description>Keywords.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3768">
                <text>Article
PeerReviewed</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
        </elementContainer>
      </elementSet>
    </elementSetContainer>
    <tagContainer>
      <tag tagId="7">
        <name>HB Economic Theory</name>
      </tag>
    </tagContainer>
  </item>
  <item itemId="491" public="1" featured="0">
    <fileContainer>
      <file fileId="514">
        <src>https://omeka.ibu.edu.ba/files/original/57332698d08a66a280b77d942d854f87.pdf</src>
        <authentication>66cf9d05abb300d0a5224d4136b67c71</authentication>
        <elementSetContainer>
          <elementSet elementSetId="4">
            <name>PDF Text</name>
            <description/>
            <elementContainer>
              <element elementId="52">
                <name>Text</name>
                <description/>
                <elementTextContainer>
                  <elementText elementTextId="3777">
                    <text>Journal of Economic and Social Studies

Fighting Poverty from the Street: Perspectives of Some Female
Informal Sector Workers on Gendered Poverty and Livelihood
Portfolios in Southern Ghana
Thomas Yeboah
Centre of Development Studies, University of Cambridge
United Kingdom
thomasgh32003@yahoo.co.uk
Lucy Owusu
Department of Geography and Rural Development, Kwame Nkrumah University of Science
and Technology,
Kumasi, Ghana
luci.owusu@gmail.com
Albert A. Arhin
Department of Geography, University of Cambridge,
United Kingdom
aaa72@cam.ac.uk
Emmanuel Kumi
School of Agriculture, Policy and Development, University of Reading,
United Kingdom
kumiandy3@gmail.com
Abstract: Over the last three decades or so, complex factors including the Keywords: Hawking;
implementation of neoliberal economic reforms has led to a decline in formal Gendered Poverty; Informal
sector employment in the Ghanaian economy. This together with increasing Sector; Surviving Strategies;
feminization of poverty has driven many, especially young women, to seek
Ghana.

livelihoods in the informal sector mainly as hawkers and head porters. Drawing
on qualitative interviews with approximately 40 urban poor women (aged 6-25
years), this paper reports the gendered aspects of poverty and the surviving
strategies of young women on urban streets. The cameos presented herein highlight
the experiences of poverty among street workers and how their livelihood portfolios
contribute to overcoming the poor socio-economic conditions facing them. The
paper shows that hawking and head portering significantly provides income for
upkeep of young women and their families through meeting consumption and
other needs. However, vulnerabilities manifested in unfavourable weather
conditions, vehicular dangers, exploitation from employers and customers often
due to lack of written work contracts are the major risks sturdily connected with
these surviving strategies. The paper concludes by arguing for policy interventions
such as subsidized credit schemes and organization of formal and informal forms
of capacity building for the urban street workers to enhance their livelihoods.

Volume 5 Number 1 Spring 2015

JEL Classification: I32, I14,

I31

Article History

Submitted: 15 November 2013
Resubmitted: 28 March 2014
Accepted: 7 May 2014

http://dx.doi.org/10.14706/JE
COSS11511
239

�Thomas Yeboah, Lucy Owusu, Albert A. Arhin, Emmanuel Kumi

Introduction
Over the past three decades or so, globalization and widespread economic
restructuring fuelled by the adoption and implementation of neoliberal economic
reforms have facilitated an increase in the growth of the informal employment sector
and has also changed the way people are connected to the formal labour market
(Bacchetta et al., 2009). At the same time, the world has witnessed increasing
political and resource attention to poverty reduction (which is seen as the primary
development objective of the century), particularly following the adoption of the
Millennium Development Goals (MDGs). Much of the global efforts towards
poverty reduction are embedded in the market-based Structural Adjustment
Packages in the 1980s and the subsequent Poverty Reduction Strategy Programmes
in the early 2000s (Kumi et al., 2014). While private sector-led policy strategies of
the neoliberal thinking are making some modest strides in relation to economic
growth, the increasing emphasis of reduced role of government in directly creating
employments has contributed significantly to the growth of the informal economy of
several developing countries (Aryeetey et al., 2000; Bryceson and Pol8tts, 2006).
Ghana has a large informal sector which is said to constitute approximately 90% of
its over 7.7 million labour force (Clarke, 2005). This sector consists of varied
industries comprising enterprises which are normally categorized as small or medium
based on their asset base, number of employees and turnover (Aryeetey, 2008; OseiTutu et al., 2010). It has been observed that the implementation of structural
adjustment policies have marginalized the urban poor resulting from declines in
formal employment and provisions of subsidized social services, and the widening
wage gaps between skilled and unskilled employments (Konadu-Agyemang, 2000;
Briggs and Yeboah, 2001; Owusu, 2012).
Additionally, the production of agricultural in many rural economies has also been
impinged on by the neoliberal reforms as “the growing of export crops divert
subsidies, land and labour from traditional subsistence agriculture to the modernized
sector while opportunities for nonfarm employment has also decreased” (Briggs and
Yeboah, 2001:5). This has not only resulted in driving many urban women to seek
multiple and diverse sources of livelihood in the informal sector but has also led to
increasingly unceasing flows of young girls from rural areas who migrate with an
idealized vision of securing employment in the already choked informal sector in
urban areas (Charmes, 2011). A multiplicity of economic activities can be found in
the informal sector. In the Ghanaian context, participants of this sector are
240

Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�Fighting Poverty from the Street: Perspectives of Some Female Informal Sector Workers on
Gendered Poverty and Livelihood Portfolios in Southern Ghana

essentially low-skilled and are involved mainly in activities such as shoe mending,
hairdressing, photography, commercial pay phone services, barbering, mechanical
repairs, dressmaking, food preparation and sales, manufacturing and repair work
including garment, watch and clock repairs as well as hawking and head portering
(Heintz and Pickbourn, 2012). While street hawking and head portering as
components of the informal sector contribute immensely to the development of the
social and economic lives of people all over the world, systematic research exploring
ways through which they contribute to livelihood strategies for urban poor youth
remain very inadequate (Awumbila and Ardayfio-Schandorf, 2008; Oberhauser and
Yeboah, 2011). This study aims to address this knowledge gap.
This paper examines the gendered aspect of poverty and how hawking and head
portering, an informal sector activities serve as livelihoods for urban poor young
women in the streets of Kumasi, the second largest city in Ghana. In particular, the
paper pays attention to examining the poverty conditions of urban poor women
engaged in street hawking and how their livelihood portfolios and surviving
strategies contribute to overcoming household poverty. We draw mainly on
qualitative interviews with some 10 female head porters and 30 urban poor women
hawking to secure their basic needs. We make no claims of generalizability of our
data due to the small nature of our sample and as such the findings reported herein
should be interpreted with some caution. However, we are particularly interested in
learning from young women themselves how they understand and experience
poverty as well as how their livelihood portfolios contribute to overcoming the
gendered dimension of poverty in urban Ghana.
The next section presents a brief literature on head porters and hawkers in Ghana.
We then present our conceptual framework/model underpinning the study. This is
followed by the research methodology. The findings and discussions of the study
predominantly feature in section four while the last section concludes by
summarizing our main arguments and its broad policy ramifications for future
development.

Poverty, Street Hawking and Head Porterage in Ghana:
A Short Literature Review
Ghana is a tropical country located on the west coast of Africa. It has 10
administrative regions and 216 decentralized districts. According to the most
Volume 5 Number 1 Spring 2015

241

�Thomas Yeboah, Lucy Owusu, Albert A. Arhin, Emmanuel Kumi

recently held Population and Housing Census, in 2010 the country has a population
of 24.87 with females accounting for 51.2 per cent and 48.8 million being males.
The country is administered by a democratically elected executive president with an
elected parliament and independent judiciary. A map of Ghana showing the regional
boundaries is shown in figure 1.
Figure 1: Map of Ghana showing administrative regions. The blue area indicates
where the field aspect of the research was undertaken

242

Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�Fighting Poverty from the Street: Perspectives of Some Female Informal Sector Workers on
Gendered Poverty and Livelihood Portfolios in Southern Ghana

Ghana has made exciting progress in growth and poverty reduction in the last two
decades, and has met or has a chance of meeting the MDGs on income poverty and
education (Annim et al., 2012). The Ghana Living Standard Survey 5 report shows
that poverty rates in Ghana is falling, having fell from 52% in 1991/92 to 28.5% in
2005/06 while extreme poverty rates also fell from 36.5% to 18.2% during the same
period (GSS, 2008). It is further argued that between 2000 and 2006, the nation
had recorded a 90% rate of progress in halving the number of people subsisting on
less than US$1.25 per day (Coleman, 2012). Additionally, a significant
improvement in other non-income related MDG indicators such as gender equality,
education and access to safe water has also been recorded in the Nation (World
Bank, 2011), and in some quarters, Ghana has been labelled as the ‘star’ of Africa in
terms of poverty reduction and human development (Nicola et al., 2009).
This significant progress achieved in the country has partly been through various
(social) policy initiatives by the Government. Archetypal of these include the
National Health Insurance Scheme (NHIS) established in 2003 which provides
equitable health insurance for all; the Education Capitation Grant (ECG), the
School Feeding Programme (SFP), the National Youth Employment Programme
(NYEP)1 which provides jobs for the unemployed and underemployed youth; and
the Livelihood Empowerment Against Poverty (LEAP) (Nicola et al., 2009).
However, a cursory look at these policy initiatives shows that the informal sector has
largely been sidelined in terms of benefitting from these Governments interventions.
As a result, about four of every ten Ghanaians, mostly in the informal sector, still
lived in poverty (GSS, 2000). Many of them are young women who work in micro
and small enterprises, or finding a survival income as hawkers in the informal
economy. Others are also engaged in the agricultural sector, mostly as food crop
farmers. Indeed, two-thirds of the working population outside agriculture is active in
the informal economy. Many are unremittingly poor, particularly women (ILO,
2004). Amuzu et al. (2010) aptly show that poverty and vulnerability in terms of
lack of opportunities in the formal sector and deprivation in Ghana has a gendered
dimension. Thus the incidence and severity of poverty in the country are higher
among females compared to their male counterparts. Many poor women in Ghana
lack access to productive resources and asset. Moreover, many also are confronted by
heavier time burden of going about their domestic activities while others have not
had the opportunity to complete formal Senior High School. Researchers such as
Ardayfio-Schandorf argues that feminization of poverty in the Ghanaian context is
rising having risen from 25.7% to 33% between 1960 and 2003 (ArdayfioVolume 5 Number 1 Spring 2015

243

�Thomas Yeboah, Lucy Owusu, Albert A. Arhin, Emmanuel Kumi

Schandorf, 2006 cited in Amuzu et al., 2010). Thus, it is right to argue that many
young women continue to experience the burden of poverty and vulnerability
especially female headed urban households in Ghana even though statistics indicate
gradual decline in the occurrence of poverty (GSS, 2008; Annim et al., 2012;
Coleman, 2012).
Over the past half century or so, street trade hawking and head portering have
emerged as surviving strategies for many youth especially in the era where there is
virtually little government support for many young women in terms of gaining
employment in the formal sector. Street hawking is primarily about selling retail
goods directly on busy city streets while the business of head (load) porterage
involves carrying goods of a customer on heads for a negotiated fee. Head porterage
is almost entirely practiced by young women and teenagers migrating from the
northern to the southern part of Ghana (Awumbila and Ardayfio-Schandorf, 2008).
While hawking and head porterage are distinct and separate economic activities, it is
largely the informal nature of them and frequent engagement with the street that
connect the two businesses (Anarfi and Kwankye, 2005). In this study, we have used
street hawking and head porters interchangeably due to the fact that large number of
the children spoken to also worked as head porters. Usually, it is the economically
active youth and in many cases children who move from rural areas to urban areas to
engage mostly as hawkers and head porters. For many, these activities provide a
source of livelihood as well as opportunities to supplement their families' income
although their activities are often done in the most hazardous circumstances.
While a number of factors such as minimal role of government in directly creating
employment, the lack of employable skills and rural-urban migration have been
identified as the causes of both street hawking and head porterage (Aryeetey et al.,
2000; Boafo-Asare, 2010), poverty is seen as the fundamental driving cause (Anarfi
et al., 2003; Awumbila and Ardayfio-Schanorf, 2008). The gendered nature of street
hawking and head porterage has been marginally explored by some researchers (e.g.
Mitullah, 2005; Awumbila and Ardayfio-Schandorf, 2008). In one comparative
study, Mitullah (2005) finds that, the majority of street hawkers are women made up
of all marital status groups – the married, single, widowed and divorced.
Head (load) porterage is almost exclusively reserved for girls, although the recent
times have seen boys/men briskly engaging in it. While both men and women are
involved in the activities of street hawking, men tend to join street hawking while
young and leave early for other jobs, women join the street trade later in life and
244

Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�Fighting Poverty from the Street: Perspectives of Some Female Informal Sector Workers on
Gendered Poverty and Livelihood Portfolios in Southern Ghana

continue. Of course, children of both sexes are now increasingly engaged in both
economic activities. In one extensive study, Anarfi (1997) found that more than a
third (36%) of street children was involved in street hawking. These children often
migrate independently to urban centres for street hawking or begin as hawkers for
other people including relatives and thereafter decide to remain on the street to take
care of themselves when they could no longer live on the wages paid to them by
those they worked for. At present, several city authorities in Ghana including the
Accra and Kumasi Metropolitan Assemblies are investing huge resources in evicting
street hawkers in particular from the street on the ground that they cause danger,
traffic, and obstruction to pedestrians and motorists alike. Whether these eviction
exercises will be effective and their implications on poverty are now gaining
considerable research attention (Boafo-Asare, 2011), and thus remain outside the
scope of this research. In this study, our emphasis has been on highlighting the
experiences of poverty among street workers as well as how their livelihood portfolios
contribute to overcoming the poor socio-economic conditions facing them.
Conceptual Framework for the Study
Our framework for understanding the poverty conditions and livelihood activities of
head porters and hawkers dwell largely on the concept of multi-dimensionality of
poverty and the reasons adduced for how peoples participation/engagement in
informal work remain an effective strategy in reducing poverty levels. Broadly
conceived, poverty - from a macroeconomic policy perspective - has conventionally
been measured mainly in terms of income and consumption dimensions with
poverty threshold indicators, such as living on less than $1.25 a day (Kiely, 2005),
which have been widely used to define who is poor and who is not as there is a
presumed high correlation between income and other measures of human wellbeing
such as health status and educational outcomes (White, 2008). This approach is
deeply rooted in classical economics of utilitarianism, which conceptualizes poverty
primarily in monetary terms and views less productivity and low economic growth as
the main structural cause of poverty. This tradition views the causes of poverty from
an individual and micro level perspective, arguing that the most influential factor in
producing poverty in many economies is low productive capacity of people which
results in low income and consumption - and hence low economic growth. However
this approach fails to capture other elements of human wellbeing and thus have
received criticisms in explaining the nature, causes and extent of people’s poverty.
Indeed poor people may not always use income in conveying what poverty actually
means to them. Gordon et al (2003) for instance argue that setting an arbitrary
Volume 5 Number 1 Spring 2015

245

�Thomas Yeboah, Lucy Owusu, Albert A. Arhin, Emmanuel Kumi

income threshold is somehow untenable and would lead to erroneous policy
conclusions due to the fact that the extent of people’s poverty is not just dependent
on income but also on the provision of certain important services, such as health,
education, sanitation and vulnerability to shocks.
A new approach which embraces diverse aspect of human wellbeing has therefore
emerged. For instance recent World Bank work on the voices of the poor together
with Sen’s philosophical works on capability approach in particular have
unequivocally broadened our understanding of poverty and as such poverty has been
recognized as a multidimensional phenomenon (Sen, 1999). Poverty in its broader
sense is now conceptualized in terms of vulnerability, participation, limited
economic opportunities and resources, assets, social exclusion and discrimination
(Nayaran et al., 2000; Brett, 2003). Poverty is therefore not just an issue of living on
less than $1.25 a day but in broader sense reflects lack of access to public goods and
services including social security and good health; non-ownership of housing or
other assets; little or no education and training; and lack of free time for educational
activities, recreation and rest (Arriagada, 2005). Sen (1999) for instance makes the
point that, poverty is a multidimensional concept describing not just low income
and consumption but deprivation of basic human capabilities, resulting in poor
health, reduced life expectancy, illiteracy and inadequate access to material and nonmaterial social goods and resources which contribute to improved well-being. This
study relied extensively on the multi-dimensional poverty concept which focuses on
several dimensions of wellbeing to assess the poverty conditions of the head porters
on the streets of Ghana. By this approach, poverty level of people is seen not just in a
uni-dimensional manner of income but the combined effect of the political,
environmental, social and economic elements (Nayaran et al, 2000).
With respect to reducing the poverty conditions of marginalized groups,
participation in informal sector work as been ‘recognized as an effective strategy
which helps people gain improvement in their living status especially in the era of
neoliberalism which has reduced the role that Government could play in providing
formal employment for the youth . The theoretical justification for marginalized
people especially women participation in informal work is embedded in works of
structuralism. Structuralist thinkers argue that people’s participation in informal
work is central to appreciating vibrant and diverse forms of economic activities
(Debrah, 2007). Participation of women in informal work has also been noted to
promote entrepreneurial dynamism that has the latent power to generate
employment and economic growth as well as income for these groups in meeting
246

Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�Fighting Poverty from the Street: Perspectives of Some Female Informal Sector Workers on
Gendered Poverty and Livelihood Portfolios in Southern Ghana

their basic needs (Debrah, 2007).Thus, from this perspective, the marginalized
population needs to be empowered through substantial investment and training for
them to engaged in activities in the informal sector in order to engineer growth and
development. The paper dwell on this view to ascertain the extent to which females’
participation in the informal sector work particularly hawking and head portering is
contributing to improving the difficult socio-economic circumstances that confronts
them.
Data and Research Methods
The qualitative methods and design was used in conducting this research. According
to Sarantakos (2005), the central principles of the qualitative methodology include
the fact that its aims are open and explorative; it involves communication between
researchers and respondents and its flexibility with regard to choice of research
instruments and procedures. The qualitative research methodology is based on
certain research foundations and these are: its perception of reality as existing in a
naturalist setting, and its interpretive, communicative and qualitative nature
(Cresswell, 2006; Denzin and Lincoln, 2005). Creswell (2006) further opines that
the focus of qualitative research is based on deriving the meaning participants hold
about a problem or issue, not what the researchers bring to the research, nor what
writers have concluded in the literature. We employed the qualitative design and
methods based on our research aims to understand how head porters and hawkers
perceive and experience poverty as well as how their livelihood portfolios contribute
to overcoming their difficult circumstances. Our aim for conducting interviews was
basically to learn from our respondent’s concerning their perceptions about their
realities on the street rather than establishing statistical evidence and causal relations
(Bryman, 2008; Creswell, 2006; Sarantakos, 2005).
Sarantakos (2005) argues that qualitative research mostly employ semi-structured
and unstructured interviews during data collection. In this way, an in-depth semi
structured interviews technique was used largely in collecting the data from some 30
female street hawkers who were engaged in selling all sorts of items, including ice
water, polythene bags and a range of food stuffs for a period of two (2) months in
Kumasi in 2012. Additionally, our sample included 10 head porters (Kayeyei1) who
carried all sort of items on their heads for people who come to do shopping in the
Central Business District of Kumasi. Participants were drawn from Kejetia, Anloga
Junction, Osei Tutu Bolivad Street and Ofori Krom Junction. Indeed, researching
the lives of urban street trade hawkers and head porters may be difficult, resource
Volume 5 Number 1 Spring 2015

247

�Thomas Yeboah, Lucy Owusu, Albert A. Arhin, Emmanuel Kumi

demanding and challenging exercise given the busy schedule of these groups who
mostly go about their normal business especially during the day. As a result, initial
agreement was made with the respondents which allowed us to carry the interviews
in the evenings around 5-7pm when most of them are closing from work. Data
collected covered the demographic characteristics of the respondents such as their
age, educational attainment, gender and ethnicity. The meanings and experience of
poverty by these young women together with how their surviving strategies serve as a
means to improving their living conditions were also covered in the data collection.
Lastly challenges associated with street workers were also collected. Transcripts from
the in-depth interviews and field notes were coded and analyzed qualitatively,
supported with the quantitative data which were inputted into the Statistical Product
and Service Solutions (SPSS) Statistics 20.0. This enabled us to generate percentages
for some of the variables. At the same time, content analysis was used to group,
compare and examine findings through positioning the results in the lens of similar
works conducted in the Ghanaian context.
Gendered Poverty and Livelihood Portfolios of Urban Poor Women:
Experience of Street Hawkers
This section presents the results of the study based on field work conducted with
participants and drawing on the relevant scholarly works on street workers in Ghana.
First the analysis looks into the demographic characteristics of the respondents. We
then move on to present the young women’s understanding and experience of
poverty and how their surviving strategies and livelihood portfolios contribute to
overcoming the poor socio-economic conditions that confronts them. We conclude
by outlining policy suggestions from Government and other non-state actors for
street trade hawkers and head porters in reducing poverty.
Demographic Characteristics of Respondents
The demographic characteristics of the respondents covered in the survey included
their age, ethnicity, gender and educational attainment. In terms of age, the
respondents sampled aged between 6 to 25 years with majority (42.9%) falling
within the age group of 6-18years. This high proportion of respondents in the age
category of 6-18 years highlights the youthful nature of people engaged in hawking
and head portering. It is important to draw attention to the fact that our sample
covered a 6year old girl who was found selling water to support household income.
The six year old Maame Ama explained:
248

Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�Fighting Poverty from the Street: Perspectives of Some Female Informal Sector Workers on
Gendered Poverty and Livelihood Portfolios in Southern Ghana

„My mother sent me here to come and sell water so that she can use
the money to buy my school books and pencil. I come here only after
school. Sometimes when I get home in the evening, I feel so tired
that I cannot study and do my homework”.
The above narrative from Maame Ama suggests that selling on the street may offer a
means for her mother to get money to provide for her educational needs. However,
such a decision to push young girls at that tender age to sell on busy urban streets
may be exploitative on the part of parents and may also have negative implications
on the education and academic performance of children. Additionally, she may be at
the risks of vehicular accidents as the streets in the Central Business District in
Kumasi always remain busy especially during the day. Another important
demographic variable of the respondents is their ethnicity. The ethnicity of the
respondents is essential, as it serves as a social indicator of the regional inequities that
espouse outmigration from remote areas, especially in the Northern Regions
(Oberhauser and Yeboah, 2011).
Almost all the participants surveyed in this study with the exception of about 5
young women, were from the northern parts of Ghana. These young females had
migrated from the Northern Regions to Kumasi with the aim of finding a survival
strategy given the lack of economic prospects and the inability of their relatives to
cater for their school needs which made them dropout of school. Thus the ethnicity
covered in the study includes Dagomba, Sisala, Gonja and Mamprusi. Indeed, street
hawking and kayayei in Southern urban Ghana, precisely Kumasi and Accra has
been reported as an occupational niche for females who migrate from the North to
the South (Awumbila, 2007). Gender wise, our focus was on young women. Thus,
our survey covered 69% females with the remaining 31% being males. Earlier
research had shown that hawking and pottering in Ghana is predominantly a female
occupation (Oberhauser and Yeboah, 2011).
In terms of education, none of respondents sampled had attained education up to
the secondary level. They were all either primary school goers or drop outs from
school. In one study by Awumbila and Ardayfio-Schandorf (2008), it was reported
that among street hawkers and porters in Accra, a total of 61% have not had any
formal education, 35% have had Primary education while only 5% have attained
Junior Secondary School education.

Volume 5 Number 1 Spring 2015

249

�Thomas Yeboah, Lucy Owusu, Albert A. Arhin, Emmanuel Kumi

The lack of higher formal educational attainment among these marginalized groups
is largely attributed to lack of financial resources and account for the increasingly
unceasing flows of young females from rural Northern Ghana to the South to seek
multiples sources of livelihoods in the informal sector in the face of declining
agricultural and agricultural- related employment in the northern parts of the
country.
Poverty: Understanding its Dimensions and Experiences from Young Women’s
Perspective
Our survey on how street trade hawkers and porters understand and experience
poverty points to four main issues. Thus, low income from work, lack of access to
productive resources and decent economic opportunities, vulnerability to diseases
and the lack of access to and utilization of health facilities (social exclusion) are the
main dynamics of poverty as indicated by the young women during our field work.
To begin with, the hawking and head portering business as a means of livelihood for
the young females does not require much skill or any huge capital outlay to start.
However, some of our respondents (4 young women) who were selling various food
items argued to have started their business through bank loans from microfinance
institutions. Notwithstanding the little resources needed to commence their
activities, it was discovered that low income from work seems to be a common
experience among all the street trade workers. Indeed, many of the activities
undertaken by young women in the informal sector such as head portering, selling of
items and working in shops/restaurants continue to attract low and irregular income
(Awumbila, 2007). As illustrated by Kwankye et al. (2007a), poverty among street
trade hawkers manifest in low earnings from work which does affect the capacity of
these young women to cater for their basic needs. Our survey indicates that, per the
experience of poverty among these poor young women, a minimum threshold of
US$1.25 is woefully inadequate for them to be considered not poor.
Similar situation has been recorded by earlier researchers. In their study of
reproductive health implications of street hawking in Accra, Kwankye et al. (2007a)
sought from hawkers the amount they considered to be adequate for them to meet
their basic daily basic needs. Their results point out that more than half of the female
hawkers in Ghana suggested an amount ranging between GH¢1.8- GH¢8.66
(US$0.91-US$4.33) to be their daily required income in order for them to meet
their basic needs. This conflicts with normative understanding of what would be
250

Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�Fighting Poverty from the Street: Perspectives of Some Female Informal Sector Workers on
Gendered Poverty and Livelihood Portfolios in Southern Ghana

needed in order to classify one as non-poor as demonstrated in the global hegemonic
project. As noted already, mainstream understanding as seen in the MDGs set $1.25
per day as the absolute poverty line. However, from the perspective of the hawkers
and porters, this amount remains woefully inadequate. Thus, income poverty from
these young women perspective and their experience ‘2transcends the international
poverty line of $1.25 a day. This may largely be attributed to the context specificity
with regards to the living circumstances. Beyond this, there were concerns about
irregularity of income earned from work. In our in-depth, interview a 15-year old
Mamuna professed:
“I come here always to sell rubbers. This economic activity I am doing is
nothing to write home about. On a very good day I get about GH¢12
(US$5.6). On bad days I get just GH¢1 (US$0.46) and sometimes I do not
get any while I walk under this scorching sun. Meanwhile, what I am doing is
not my own business; I only get more income (commission) from my Madam
if I am able to sell more. My income from this work shows that I am poor.
The government must come to our help”.
The above statement from Mamuna does not only highlight the difficulty associated
with her source of income but more importantly how irregular her income source
could be from her livelihood. Indeed, many of the hawkers in the Metropolis
sampled mostly do not own what they sell. Many have largely been employed by
people who own big supermarkets in the Metropolis and thus get commission from
their employers based on how well they are able to sell for these supermarkets. Those
hired by shop owners also undertake task such as running errands, cleaning and
washing dishes as well as refilling shelves (Oberhauser and Yeboah, 2011).
Consequently aside the 4 women who indicated to have started the business through
loans suggesting that they own their business, the remaining were employees
working for supermarkets. Inability to sell much on the day means that they get little
income from their employers. It is imperative however to note that working
relationship between these hawkers and their employers is seen as healthy and cordial
(Berg, 2007). Moreover, the head porters also argued that in recent times, they find
it difficult to get loads to carry, thus, limiting the opportunity for them to earn
higher income. A 15 year old who migrated from Northern Ghana to pursue head
portering had this to say during a focus group discussion:
“Nowadays, business is not good. Sometimes I do not get any load to carry.
This forces me to borrow money from my friends to buy food”. Worryingly,
daily earnings are mostly spent on basic necessities, such as food, sanitary
Volume 5 Number 1 Spring 2015

251

�Thomas Yeboah, Lucy Owusu, Albert A. Arhin, Emmanuel Kumi

facilities and water with little left for savings (Berg, 2007). In effect, low and
irregular income from hawking and portering as experienced by our survey
participants is a major dimension of poverty strongly associated with young
women working in the informal sector”.
At the same time, the experiences of poverty among female informal sector hawkers
evident from our interviews indicate that lack of access to resources and decent
economic opportunities remain a key dimension. Indeed, in many contexts,
“gendered inequality manifested in unequal distribution of economic resources and
power at the intra-household levels are key factors which do push and keep
households especially female headed ones in poverty” (Amuzu et al., 2010:20).
Interview data suggest that lack of formal, decent and sustainable employment
opportunities remain elusive to these poverty-stricken young females. Their
exclusion from gaining decent employment has undeniably pushed them to resort to
hawking and head portering. Reasons cited by the participants of this study for the
lack of decent employment opportunities included their low educational attainment
(drop out from school), lack of employable skills and generally, the lack of
Government support in creating industries in the formal economy which could have
absorbed them.
In Ghana, the major Government initiative providing economic opportunities for
young people has largely been exprel2ssed through the National Youth Employment
Programme (NYEP), which seeks to provide jobs for underemployed and
unemployed youth. There is ample justification for focusing on the youth given the
high youth unemployment rates in the country, which drives migration of young
people from rural areas to Southern cities in search of non-existing jobs (World
Bank, 2011). However, given the low level of educational attainment and drop out
among these young street trade hawkers and porters, it could be argued that the
NYEP largely discriminate against these poorer young women on the street as the
programme employs young people with at least Junior Secondary School education
(World Bank, 2011). Additionally, the lack of the access to resources has been linked
to inequality and socio-cultural practices, as females by the standards of the
Ghanaian society are mostly limited when it comes to owning productive resources.
This differential access to resources has resulted in the females facing heavy burdens
and stressful socio-economic conditions (Oberhauser and Yeboah, 2011).
Added to the lack of resources and economic opportunities, our survey results
indicate that vulnerability to diseases and the lack of access to and utilization of
252

Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�Fighting Poverty from the Street: Perspectives of Some Female Informal Sector Workers on
Gendered Poverty and Livelihood Portfolios in Southern Ghana

health services is another pathway in which young women working in the informal
sector experience poverty. In fact, the youth and mobile populations especially those
working as hawkers and porters are considered at higher risk of becoming infected
with sicknesses (Garenne, 2003:17). Almost all of our survey participants argued
that, the high levels of susceptibility to diseases considerably represent a major
dimension of their vulnerability. The major health problems facing the head porters
and street trade hawkers include malaria, headache, diarrhea and cholera. This is
attributed to the tedious nature of their work and the insanitary living conditions in
which many of them find themselves.
Despite the high propensity to falling sick and exposure to risks due to their living
conditions, the majority of these hawkers and porters do not take proper medication.
In Ghana, the major health intervention initiated by the Government to ensure
adequate access to and utilization of health service is the (NHIS). The purpose for
implementing the scheme is for the government to cater for health treatment of the
aged, the poor as well as children of parents who both subscribe to the scheme
(Arhin, 2013). However per the operations of the scheme, , as dependent minors,
many of these young porters and hawkers are supposed to be insured by their parents
as there is fixed charge of GH¢ 5 (US$2.28) for processing and registration.
Unfortunately, most of them stated that their parents are poor and thus have not
been able to afford initial charge. This suggests that these young females cannot be
covered under the NHIS as their parents’ have failed to provide the amount needed
for processing their registration. This means that, they have to be registered on their
own and have failed to register. Information elicited indicates that, through the
financial assistance of Street Children Development Foundation (SCDF), which is a
non-governmental organization; about 3000 head porters in the study area have been
registered under the NHIS. Though this initiative is commendable, a lot still needs
to be done considering the current estimate of over 30,000 street trade hawkers and
porters in Southern Ghana (UNICEF, 2007). Moreover, even those porter girls who
have been registered under the NHIS may not be able to utilize public health
services. The reason for this could be summed up in a comment by a 14 year head
porter, Zenabu:
“I am privileged to have been registered under the NHIS by the SCDF.
However I receive little attention from health personnel’s when I visit the
hospital for treatment when sick because the nurses don’t look after me since
they say I am wearing dirty dress”.

Volume 5 Number 1 Spring 2015

253

�Thomas Yeboah, Lucy Owusu, Albert A. Arhin, Emmanuel Kumi

The above comment highlights some important issues that need careful scrutiny.
First it suggests that aside the high propensity of falling sick as a dimension of
poverty, many of these young women experience exclusion from mainstream society
demonstrated in the lack of attention on the part of health personnel’s who are
supposed to rather provide protection and security for these young ones. This in
effect may reinforce their feeling of powerlessness and ruling out from society.
Indeed ‘‘poverty is gendered in its predisposing factors, processes and impact and
that the ways in which young women experience poverty are related to their position
and situation in society’’ (Awumbila, 2006:17). Additionally, the lack of proper
attention from health personnel’s when these young porters visit hospital could make
them resort to self-medication. Certainly, Kwankye et al. (2007b) have reported that
self-diagnosis and self-medication seem to be commonplace among these young
women on the street, often relying on friends who have suffered similar symptoms
beforehand. Thus, when the porters and hawkers visit the local chemist, they have
already determined what they want, and buy the drugs over the counter from shop
attendants, who may not ask any questions. Such practices may further complicate
the health situation of these hawkers and porters and push them into ever poorer
health; most of them seem to be unaware of the implications of this or indifferent to
what happens to them.
Overall, it could be argued that poverty among these poor youth hawking and
carrying various loads on their heads is a visible condition with manifold
manifestations as evident in diverse aspects of their socio-economic circumstances.
Nonetheless, generalizing these dimensions of poverty for all informal sector workers
would be simplistic, insufficient and problematic. Indeed, the association between
poverty and informal sector workers does not hold uniformly across space. This is
because the self-employed, particularly micro-enterprise owners, are found to have
average earnings far above the minimum wage, allowing an inference, a lower
likelihood of poverty among such people (Charmes, 2012). Consequently, in many
cases, it might be incorrect to claim that the various dimensions of poverty reported
by the porters and hawkers in our study are the defining characteristic of the whole
informal sector. Nevertheless, the experiences reported herein have far wider
implications for social protection and poverty reduction strategies.
Surviving Strategies and Poverty Reduction

254

Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�Fighting Poverty from the Street: Perspectives of Some Female Informal Sector Workers on
Gendered Poverty and Livelihood Portfolios in Southern Ghana

The preceding discussions have highlighted the various dimensions of poverty
experienced by young people, finding a survival strategy in urban highways of
Ghana. This section presents how the livelihood portfolios of these young people
contribute to overcoming their poverty conditions and the difficulty circumstances
that confront them. We also highlight the difficulties associated with their surviving
strategies. As noted already, the activities undertaken by porters and hawkers require
little or no capital to begin. Field observations revealed a considerable degree of the
organization of the work undertaken by the street trade workers. Many have adopted
the strategy of moving in groups, often providing information on available
opportunities for their acquaintances while ensuring that there is no struggle among
them in the quest to get a load to carry (Oberhauser and Yeboah, 2011).
Undeniably, many of the street trade workers often do not operate in haphazard
manner but in well-defined spaces, largely based on ethnicity (Awumbila and
Ardayfio-Schandorf, 2008). This confirms the assertion that the livelihoods
portfolios of urban poor street workers are often embedded in social relationships
although searching for load to carry is done independently (Berg, 2007). Thus, in
their day to day work, ethnic spaces have been developed among specific ethnic
groups, serving as a mechanism to avoid any potential conflict. However, not much
recognition is given by the porters regarding the load they carry. Thus, in the quest
to earn more income, many of these young women give very little or no
consideration to their age but take on loads according to their perceived ability to
carry the load. The activity undertaken by our participants show considerable gender
variations. While the males are able to do multiple sources of activities, females were
only confined to transporting goods from shops to lorry stations for customers. Aside
carrying loads with trucks, males are also engaged in other activities such as serving
as shop assistants, working in restaurants, washing dishes and selling of goods such as
coconut and various assorted items. In effect, the activities undertaken by street trade
workers is highly gendered with males involved in the remunerative loads while their
female counterparts are mostly limited to carrying smaller loads of petty traders and
travellers which attract little pay (Awumbila and Ardayfio-Schandorf, 2008). The
gendered disparities with males carrying heavier loads and engaging in multiple
activities compared to their female counterparts may be attributed to the strong
physical strength of the males.
As a way of contributing to poverty reduction and the difficulties confronting the
urban poor, particularly the females, hawking and portering serve as a means of
earning income. Our survey indicate that, on a very good day, porters and hawkers
Volume 5 Number 1 Spring 2015

255

�Thomas Yeboah, Lucy Owusu, Albert A. Arhin, Emmanuel Kumi

could earn on the average between GH¢20-40 (US$9.11-US$18.21). However, in
bad times, some earn absolutely nothing and had to rely on acquaintances in order
to meet daily basic needs such as buying food and water, an indication that earnings
fluctuate with the fortunes of the markets and clients. Moreover, earnings also differ
with respect to gender. Oberhauser and Yeboah (2011) argue that income
distribution among street trade hawkers and porters are gendered as males are able to
earn higher income compared to their female counterparts. They show that on the
average, females earn between GH¢15–105 (US$6.83-US$47.81) weekly whereas
the males earn GH¢86–145 (US$39.16-US$66.02) per week. Similar situation has
been documented by other scholars. In their study of gendered poverty, migration
and livelihood strategies of female porters in Accra- Ghana, Awumbila and ArdayfioSchandorf (2008) found that males earn on the average GH¢3 per day (US$1.37)
compared to GH¢1-2 (US$0.46-0.91) for the females. “The multiplicity of work by
males, together with their ability to enter into long-term arrangements with clients as
well as the ability to transport higher volume of goods more efficiently; and therefore
serving more clients mainly account for the gender differences in earnings”
(Oberhauser and Yeboah, 2011:31). Gender differences in earnings has also been
linked to the higher bargaining power and capability of the male workers who are
able to bicker payments for the services they render depending on the size and
weight of the load and distance to be covered. For the females, payment mostly
depend on the kind heartedness of clients who pay any amount they consider
suitable (Awumbila and Ardayfio-Schandorf, 2008). This reinforces the
argumentation of Beneria (2003), who forcefully maintains that societal perceptions
regarding females working in the unrecognised informal sector as ready to settle for
any payment for their services often contribute to their exploitation and social
exclusion in society.
Notwithstanding the gendered disparities in terms of earnings, overall, income
earned from the various activities contribute significantly to reducing the poverty
conditions among street workers and their household. Earnings from low paid
onerous work help to meeting basic needs. While there were complains of lack of
decent sleeping places, it was discovered that food to eat was not a major issue. Many
have even adopted the strategy of eating once or twice in order to be able to save
from their earnings. Thus, we discovered that hawking and portering serve as means
of contributing to household income in supporting other relatives. Significantly too,
the porters who are migrants from the relatively poorer Northern Regions argued to
occasionally send remittances and other items to their families up North.
Participatory and much anecdotal evidence shows that some especially the males are
256

Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�Fighting Poverty from the Street: Perspectives of Some Female Informal Sector Workers on
Gendered Poverty and Livelihood Portfolios in Southern Ghana

able to remit in kind and send items such as imported rice, soap and other
household provisions to their families up North (Anarfi and Kwankye, 2005). The
means through which the porters send these items are basically through relations and
other fellow migrants who are going back. Sewing machine, clothes, utensils among
other things were the material possessions that have been acquired by the hawkers
and porters through income from their work. Some have also been able to open
micro- businesses such as selling drinks, food stuffs and home appliances.
Additionally, while some are not able to save any earnings, others manage to save
some part of their earnings with the SCDF. In an interview, the director of SCDF
argued that about 4000 porter girls were saving some part of their earnings with the
foundation at the time of the survey. There is no interest charge for rendering this
service to the porters. This informal system through which these young females save
their earnings offer the merit of low transaction cost, little bureaucracy and paper
works, no interest charge and the flexibility to adjust and ability to get their savings
back in times of difficult financial situation compared to the formal banking systems
which may require some level of financial literacy (Berg, 2007). This informal system
of saving some part of their earnings afforded the porter girls the opportunity to gain
access to their money when confronted with any extremely difficult situation when
they could receive no assistance from anywhere. It has also afforded many the
opportunities to buy material possessions which cost relatively higher such as the
sewing machine.
Overall, our findings suggest that hawking and portering significantly serve as an
important livelihood strategy (employment and income) engaged by the urban poor
particularly females especially in the era of neoliberal economic reforms which has
largely limited the possibility for young people to gain employment in the formal
sector. Thus, many through hawking and portering continually, are able to meet
their consumption needs, acquire material possessions while others have also moved
beyond into micro enterprise development, thus directly improving household
welfare. Additionally, a good number of porters who migrated from the rural
savannah zones to the Southern cities, sometimes without the knowledge of their
familial relations, have been able to acquire the needed financial resources in
preparation towards their marriage life and transition into adulthood (Kwankye et
al., 2007b).
Notwithstanding the potential role of these activities in contributing to overcoming
poverty, several factors were identified which serve as great deal of challenge for the
Volume 5 Number 1 Spring 2015

257

�Thomas Yeboah, Lucy Owusu, Albert A. Arhin, Emmanuel Kumi

porters and hawkers. Vehicular dangers, insult and cheating from pedestrians and
difficulties associated with the vagaries of the weather were mentioned as particularly
important factors facing hawkers and porters while going about their activities on the
streets. Of particular relevance is the insult and robbery from customers. It was
discovered that many of the porters who carry load are given amounts that do not
commensurate the load they carry and any attempt to express their dissatisfaction in
their own language is often misconstrued as insult, which attract reproach, insult and
intimidation. Indeed, head porters and street trade hawkers are liable to face
discourteous treatment and insults from customers to whom they render services
(Kwankye et al., 2007b). The conflicts, disagreements and quarrels between the
porters and their customers is mainly attributed to the lack of clarity surrounding
fees charged for carrying loads (Awumbila, 2006). In this way, the lack of standards
for hawkers and porters to rate their services in monetary terms and non-existing
‘formal structures that protects their livelihoods contributes to their vulnerability in
today’s broadening marketization’ (Oberhauser and Yeboah, 2011:33). Moreover,
extremely hot sunny conditions that they are exposed to, causes severe headache
among these porters and hawkers who work for more than eighteen (18) hours
under the scourging sun. In the evident of rainfall, especially at night, the porters
were seen helpless as they do not have decent accommodation. These complexities
with regards to the difficulties confronting the livelihood portfolios of young people
on the street (hawker and porters) point to urgent policy responses. The next section
sums up the study and proposes a set of policy options.
Conclusion and Implications for Poverty Reduction
Our study on the gendered aspect of poverty and livelihood portfolios in Ghana has
shown the interlocking dimensions of poverty experienced by young women and
how their surviving strategies contribute to overcoming poverty. Growing body of
research has shown that economic restructuring following the neoliberal economic
reforms and socio-cultural practices largely account for pushing many of these folks
to find their livelihoods on urban highways due to their limited access to resources,
productive assets and sustainable employment in the formal sector (Oberhauser and
Yeboah, 2011).
Poverty reduction strategies have become the cardinal policy focus for several
countries including Ghana in recent times. Although poverty is now recognized in
many quarters to have a multiple dimensions policy prescription and strategies are
still firmly rooted in the idea of money-metric $1.25 a day aspect of it. One of the
258

Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�Fighting Poverty from the Street: Perspectives of Some Female Informal Sector Workers on
Gendered Poverty and Livelihood Portfolios in Southern Ghana

consistent measures to track progress on poverty reduction in the wake of the
Millennium Development Goals (MDGs) has been the ability of countries to reduce
the number of people living on less than two dollars a day. By 2010, Ghana was
already a 'star performer' as far as achieving the MDGs goal on poverty reduction
were concerned as, ahead of the target date of 2015, the country was able to have
reduced the number of its population living on $2 a day from 52% in 1991/92 to
28.5% in 2005/06 while extreme poverty rates of those living on about a dollar also
fell from 36.5% to 18.2% during the same period (Ghana Statistical Service, 2008;
UNDP Ghana and NDPC/GOG 2010; 2012). Yet, as this study shows, poverty has
different dimensions which need to be factored into the determination of the
progress of poverty reduction effort.
Our study therefore contributes to the growing body of research emphasizing the
multi-dimensionality of poverty (Sen, 1999; Anand &amp; Sen, 1997; Nnarayan et al,
2000). The paper demonstrates that poverty is therefore not just an issue of living on
less than $1.25 a day but in broader sense reflects lack of access to public goods and
services including social security and good health; non-ownership of assets and little
or no education, susceptibility to diseases and social exclusion of the marginalized
populations. While income is very important for poor people, it is not the sole
determinant to enable them enjoy wellbeing and quality of life. Issues such as access
to public goods and resources, creation of opportunities for participation in
productive ventures are all determinants of poverty.
Thus, poverty has many facets with multiple manifestations, often revolving around
living circumstances and situations. While portering and hawking provide income in
meeting consumption and other material needs, it cannot serve as a sustainable
means of livelihood given the fluctuations in earnings and the various identified
challenges associated with it. We also take note of the fact that, a huge number of
people are involved in the hawking and portering businesses thus attempts to bar
them from engaging in such activities will be counter-productive. In view of this,
the following set of policy options are being proposed in efforts towards improving
the situation of street trade workers.
First, this paper adds voice to the calls for more gender-based policies and
programmes in livelihood development through the provision of decent and
sustainable employment programmes. Government, NGOs and other stakeholders
whose mission are consistent with the welfare of the urban poor could come to the
aid of these young women by providing decent employment especially in the area of
Volume 5 Number 1 Spring 2015

259

�Thomas Yeboah, Lucy Owusu, Albert A. Arhin, Emmanuel Kumi

micro enterprise development. This must be complemented with practical trainings
and capacity building programmes which will enable these young people the
opportunity to manage their own micro enterprises. Additionally, the Ministry of
Women and Children Affairs in Ghana could team up with human right-based
NGOs in providing healthcare and safety nets for these young people. Moreover,
these agencies could make their offices open or could possibly establish an accessible
centre where these young women could seek advice and report any abusive and
exploitative act that confronts them.
At the same time, Government could come to the aid of the growing number of
hawkers, organize them and provide them with subsidized micro loans in order to
help them expand their livelihood portfolios while others could also diversify into
more stable income earning activities. There are schemes such as the Micro-finance
and Small Loans Centre (MASLOC) and the Hawkers Empowerment Programme,
which basically aim at equipping hawkers, head porters and food vendors with skills
and start-up capital and to better improve their standards of living and to properly
engage them in some economic activity that adds value to the nation needs. Such
schemes need to be revitalized and scaled up to reach the throngs of young people
finding their livelihoods on urban highways. Of fundamental to the solution of street
hawking also lies in the expansion of access to education, skills development and the
need to bridge the rural-urban divide which serve as a primary motivation for
migration of young people from rural to urban streets. While our recommendations
are not necessarily new, we are of the view that they will be accorded with the
urgency and the attention they deserve by the respective Authorities mandated to do
so.
References
Amuzu, C., Jones, N. &amp; Pereznieto, P. (2010). Gendered Risks, Poverty and
Vulnerability in Ghana: To What Extent is the LEAP Cash Transfer Programme
Making a Difference? Overseas Development Institute, UK. Retrieved on 13 March
2013 from http://www.odi.org.uk/sites/odi.org.uk/files/odi-assets/publicationsopinion-files/6252.pdf.
Anarfi, J. K. (1997). Vulnerability to sexually transmitted disease: street children in
Accra. Health Transition Review,7(1), 281-306.

260

Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�Fighting Poverty from the Street: Perspectives of Some Female Informal Sector Workers on
Gendered Poverty and Livelihood Portfolios in Southern Ghana

Anarfi, J.K. Kwankye, S.O. (2005). The Costs and Benefits of Children’s
Independent Migration from Northern to Southern Ghana. A Paper Presented to
‘Children and Youth in Emerging and Transforming Societies Childhoods. 29 June3 July, Oslo, Norway.
Anand, S., &amp; Sen, A. (1997). Concepts of human development and poverty: a
multidimensional perspective. New York: UNDP.
Anarfi, J.K., Kwankye, S., Ofuso-Mensah, A. &amp; Tiemoko, R. (2003). Migration
from and to Ghana: A background paper. Country Background Paper C4. Migration
DRC, University of Sussex, Brighton.
Annim, S. K., Mariwah, S. &amp; Sebu, J. (2012). Spatial inequality and household
poverty in Ghana. Economic Systems, 36, 487-505.
Arhin, A. A. (2013). Promising Start, but bleak future? Progress of Ghana's National
Health Insurance Schemes towards Universal Health Coverage. Developing Country
Studies, 3(13), 151-159.
Arriagada, I. (2005). Dimensions of poverty and gender policies. CEPAL REVIEW,
85, 99-110.
Aryeetey, E., Harrigan, J.T. &amp; Nissanke, M. (2000). Economic reforms in Ghana: The
miracle and the mirage: Africa World Press.
Aryeetey, E. (2008). “Need for a Small and Medium Enterprise Charter in Ghana”,
In: 50th Anniversary Lecture of the Association of Ghana Industries, Accra, Ghana.
Awumbila, M. (2006). Gender equality and poverty in Ghana: implications for
poverty reduction strategies. GeoJournal, 67, 149-161.
Awumbila, M. &amp; Ardayfio-Schandorf, E. (2008). Gendered poverty, migration and
livelihood strategies of female porters in Accra, Ghana. Norsk Geografisk TidsskriftNorwegian Journal of Geography, 62, 171-179.
Bacchetta, M., Ernst, E. &amp; Bustamante, J. P. (2009). Globalization and informal jobs
in developing countries: International Labour Organization and World Trade
Organisation.Geneva.
Volume 5 Number 1 Spring 2015

261

�Thomas Yeboah, Lucy Owusu, Albert A. Arhin, Emmanuel Kumi

Benería, L., Berik, G. &amp; Floro, M. (2003). Gender, development, and globalization:
Economics as if all people mattered: Routledge New York.
Boafoa - Asare, D.N.Y. (2010). A Study of the Street Hawking Phenomenon: A
Review of Intervention Programmes. A Thesis Submitted to the Department of
Business Administration, Ashesi University College in partial fulfilment of the
requirements for the award of Bachelor of Science in Business Administration.
Berg, C. (2007). The Kayayei: survival in the city of Accra: Social capital and
vulnerability in the lives of female head porters in Accra, Ghana. Master thesis for
the master International Development Studies Presented at the International School
for Humanities and Social Sciences University of Amsterdam.
Bryman, A. (2008). Social Research Methods, 3rd Ed. UK: Oxford University Press.
Brett, E. A. (2003). Participation and accountability in development management.
The Journal of Development Studies, 40, 1-29.
Briggs, J. &amp; Yeboah, I. E. A. (2001). Structural adjustment and the contemporary
sub‐Saharan African city. Area, 33, 18-26.
Bryceson, D. F., &amp; Potts, D. (2006). African urban economies: Viability, vitality or
vitiation? New York: Palgrave Macmillan.
Charmes, J. (2012). The informal economy worldwide: trends and characteristics.
Margin: The Journal of Applied Economic Research, 6, 103-132.
Charmes, J. (2011). A worldwide overview of trends and characteristics of
employment in the informal economy and informal sector in a gender perspective.
Contribution to the update of the ILO-WIEGO Women and Men in the Informal
Economy.
Clarke, E. (2005). Do occupational health services really exist in Ghana? A special
focus on the agricultural and informal sectors. Accra, Ghana: Ghana Health Services.
Retrieved on 26th September, 2013 from http://wiego.org/publications/dooccupational-health-services-really-exist-ghana-special-focusagricultural-and-infor.

262

Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�Fighting Poverty from the Street: Perspectives of Some Female Informal Sector Workers on
Gendered Poverty and Livelihood Portfolios in Southern Ghana

Coleman, S. (2012). Where Does the Axe Fall? Inflation Dynamics and Poverty
Rates: Regional and Sectoral Evidence for Ghana. World Development, 40, 24542467.
Creswell, J. W. (2006). Qualitative Inquiry And Research Design: Choosing Among
Five Approaches Author: John W. Creswell, Publisher: Sage Publica
Debrah, Y. A. (2007). Promoting the informal sector as a source of gainful
employment in developing countries: insights from Ghana. The International Journal
of Human Resource Management, 18(6), 1063-1084
Denzin, N. K., &amp; Lincoln, Y. S. (2005). The SAGE handbook of qualitative
research.
Garenne, M. (2003). ‘Migration, Urbanisation and Child Health in Africa: A global
perspective’, Paper prepared for Conference on African Migration in Comparative
Perspective, Johannesburg, South Africa.
Ghana Statistical Service (2000).Ghana living standards survey: Report of the Fourth
round. Accra: Ghana. Retrieved on 28 March 2013 from
http://www.statsghana.gov.gh/ nada/index.php/catalog/14/export.
Ghana Statistical Service (GSS). (2008). Ghana living standards survey: Report of
the Fifth round. Accra: Ghana. Retrieved on 8th August, 2013 from
http://www.statsghana. gov.gh/docfiles/glss5_report.pdf.
Gordon, D., Nandy, S., Pantazis, C., Pemberton, S &amp; Townsend P. (2003). Child
poverty in the Developing World, The Policy Press, UK
Heintz, J. &amp; Pickbourn, L. (2012). The Determinants of Selection into Nonagricultural Self employment in Ghana. Margin: The Journal of Applied Economic
Research, 6, 181-209.
International Labour Organisation (ILO). (2004). Working out of poverty: The
Ghana Decent Work Pilot Programme. Retrieved on 7 February 2013 from
http://www. ilo.org/public/english/bureau/dwpp/download/ghana/ghbooklet.pdf.

Volume 5 Number 1 Spring 2015

263

�Thomas Yeboah, Lucy Owusu, Albert A. Arhin, Emmanuel Kumi

Kiely, R.A.Y (2005): Globalization and Poverty, and the Poverty of Globalization
Theory. Current Sociology, 53, 895 914 Konadu‐Agyemang, K. (2000). The best of
times and the worst of times: structural adjustment programs and uneven
development in Africa: the case of Ghana. The Professional Geographer, 52, 469-483.
Kumi, E., Arhin, A.A &amp; Yeboah, T. (2014). Can Post-2015 Sustainable
Development Goals Survive Neoliberalism? A Critical Examination of the
Sustainable Development Neoliberalism Nexus in Developing Countries: Journal of
Environment, Development and Sustainability, 16,539-554.
Kwankye, S. O., Nyarko, P &amp; C. Tagoe. (2007a). Reproductive Health
Implications of Street Hawking in Accra. Union for African Population Studies.
Fifth African Population Census, Arusha, Tanzania: 10-17 December, 2007.
Kwankye, S. O., Anarfi, J.K., Tagoe, C.A &amp; Castaldo, A. (2007b). “Coping
Strategies of Independent Child Migrants from Northern Ghana to Southern
Cities.” Working Paper T-23, Sussex, UK: Development Research Centre on
Migration, Globalisation and Poverty, University of Sussex.
Mitullah, W.V. (2003). Street vending in African cities: A synthesis of empirical
finding from Kenya, Cote d'Ivoire, Ghana, Zimbabwe, Uganda and South Africa.
Background Paper for the 2005 World Development Report.
Nicola, J. Ahazie, W. &amp; Doh, D. (2009). “Social Protection and Children:
Opportunities and Challenges in Ghana” UNICEF, GHANA-Ministry of
Employment and Social Welfare. Retrieved on 9 October, 2103 from
http://www.odi.org.uk/sites/odi.org.uk/files/odi-assets/publications-opinionfiles/4935.pdf.
Narayan, D., Patel, R., Schafft, K., Rademacher, A. &amp; Koch-Schulte, S. (2000). Can
anyone hear us? : Oxford University Press New York.
Oberha’user, A. M. &amp; Yeboah, M. A. (2011). Heavy burdens: Gendered livelihood
strategies of porters in Accra, Ghana. Singapore Journal of Tropical Geography, 32,
22-37.
Osei-Tutu, P., &amp; Nhancale, B. (2010). Hidden forestry revealed: Characteristics,
constraints and opportunities for small and medium forest enterprises in Ghana:
264

Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�Fighting Poverty from the Street: Perspectives of Some Female Informal Sector Workers on
Gendered Poverty and Livelihood Portfolios in Southern Ghana

International and International Institute for Environment and Development,
London.
Owusu, F. Y. (2012). Organizational culture and public sector reforms in a postWashington consensus era: Lessons from Ghana’s good reformers. Progress in
Development Studies, 12, 135-151.
Sarantakos, S. (2005). Social Research, Third Edition, Palgrave Macmillan, New
York.
Sen, A. (1999). Development as freedom. Oxford University Press.
United Nations Children’s Fund (UNICEF) (2007). At a Glance: Ghana Statistics.
Retrieved on 23rd February, 2103 from http://www.unicef.org/infobycountry/ghana_
statistics .html.
United Nations (2000). United Nations General Assembly: United Nations
Millennium Declaration. A/RES/55/2. Resolution adopted by the General Assembly.
Retrieved
on
12
September,
2013
from
http://www.un.org/en/ga/search/view_doc.asp?symbol=A/RES/ 55/2&amp;Lang=E.
UNDP Ghana and NDPC/GOG (2012). 2010 Ghana Millennium Development
Millennium Development Goals Report: Accra
UNDP Ghana and NDPC/GOG (2010). 2008 Ghana Millennium Development
Millennium Development Goals Report: Accra
White, H. (2008). The measurement of poverty. In The companion to development
studies. 2nd ed. V. Desai and R. Potter, 25–39. London: Hodder.
World Bank. (2011). Tackling poverty in Northern Ghana. Washington D.C. The
World
Bank.
Retrieved
on
15
January
2013
from
http://documents.worldbank.org/curated/en/ 2011/03/14238095/tackling-povertynorthern-ghana.

Volume 5 Number 1 Spring 2015

265

�Thomas Yeboah, Lucy Owusu, Albert A. Arhin, Emmanuel Kumi
i Kayayei (Sing. Kayayoo) is the local term for a female porter or bearer from Ghana, and is a
person who carries objects for others. The term can be broken down into two words, Kaya,
meaning load/luggage/goods in Hausa language, and Yei, meaning women/females in Ga
language, as the role is almost exclusively carried out by females.
Ii NYEP is now known as the Ghana Youth Employment and Entrepreneurial Development
Agency (GYEEDA).

Appendix 1: SURVEY/CHECKLIST ON UNDERSTANDING OF
POVERTY, ITS EXPERIENCE AND SURVIVING STRATEGIES AMONG
HEAD PORTERS IN GHANA
This is an interview guide scheduled to assess the perceptions, understanding, causes
and experience of poverty as well as how the surviving strategies of head porters and
hawkers working in the informal sector contribute to overcoming their poverty
conditions in Kumasi, Ghana. The researcher would be very grateful if you could
provide answers to these questions. All information given shall be treated
confidentially.
Part One: Demographic Characteristics of Respondents
1. Sex (a) Male (b) Female
2. Name of
respondent.......................................................................................
3. Age of
respondents.........................................................................................
4. Educational level (a) Primary (b) JHS (c) Drop out d) No formal
education
5. Where do you come from? a) Northern region b) Upper east c) Upper
west (d) other
Part two: Understanding of poverty and its experience among informal workers
6. What is your understanding of the term poverty?
7. Based on your living situation, how would you rank living conditions?
a) Very poor
(b) poor (c) non-poor
(d) rich
8. Can you explain the reason for your answer?
9. How does poverty manifest in your life?
10. What are the various difficulties facing you here?
266

Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�Fighting Poverty from the Street: Perspectives of Some Female Informal Sector Workers on
Gendered Poverty and Livelihood Portfolios in Southern Ghana

11. What has accounted for your poor living situation?
Part three: Surviving strategies and livelihood activities
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.

What kinds of activities are you involved in here?
How long have you been hawking here?
How many hours do you spend on the street daily?
On the average, how much money are you able to make in a day?
In what ways do your activities contribute to improving your living
circumstances?
17. How does the activities you do help you and your family?
18. What are the major challenges facing you here while hawking?
19. What do you think should be done to improve upon your business?

Volume 5 Number 1 Spring 2015

267

�</text>
                  </elementText>
                </elementTextContainer>
              </element>
            </elementContainer>
          </elementSet>
        </elementSetContainer>
      </file>
    </fileContainer>
    <elementSetContainer>
      <elementSet elementSetId="1">
        <name>Dublin Core</name>
        <description>The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.</description>
        <elementContainer>
          <element elementId="79">
            <name>Extent</name>
            <description>The size or duration of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3770">
                <text>2416</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="50">
            <name>Title</name>
            <description>A name given to the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3771">
                <text>Fighting Poverty from the Street: Perspectives of Some Female Informal Sector Workers on Gendered Poverty and Livelihood Portfolios in Southern Ghana</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="96">
            <name>Author</name>
            <description>Author</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3772">
                <text>Yeboah, Tomas
Owusu, Lucy
Arhin, Albert. A
Kumi, Emmanuel</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="94">
            <name>Abstract</name>
            <description>A summary of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3773">
                <text>Over the last three decades or so, complex factors including the implementation of neoliberal economic reforms has led to a decline in formal sector employment in the Ghanaian economy. This together with increasing feminization of poverty has driven many, especially young women, to seek livelihoods in the informal sector mainly as hawkers and head porters. Drawing on qualitative interviews with approximately 40 urban poor women (aged 6-25 years), this paper reports the gendered aspects of poverty and the surviving strategies of young women on urban streets. The cameos presented herein highlight the experiences of poverty among street workers and how their livelihood portfolios contribute to overcoming the poor socio-economic conditions facing them. The paper shows that hawking and head portering significantly provides income for upkeep of young women and their families through meeting consumption and other needs. However, vulnerabilities manifested in unfavourable weather conditions, vehicular dangers, exploitation from employers and customers often due to lack of written work contracts are the major risks sturdily connected with these surviving strategies. The paper concludes by arguing for policy interventions such as subsidized credit schemes and organization of formal and informal forms of capacity building for the urban street workers to enhance their livelihoods.</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="45">
            <name>Publisher</name>
            <description>An entity responsible for making the resource available</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3774">
                <text>International Burch University</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="40">
            <name>Date</name>
            <description>A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3775">
                <text>2015</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="97">
            <name>Keywords</name>
            <description>Keywords.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3776">
                <text>Article
PeerReviewed</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
        </elementContainer>
      </elementSet>
    </elementSetContainer>
    <tagContainer>
      <tag tagId="6">
        <name>H Social Sciences (General)</name>
      </tag>
    </tagContainer>
  </item>
  <item itemId="492" public="1" featured="0">
    <fileContainer>
      <file fileId="515">
        <src>https://omeka.ibu.edu.ba/files/original/2e3623ff8d78633c6eaf4435523208c6.pdf</src>
        <authentication>e2b6bdfbdb66f29ac5e8a8c963e7eaba</authentication>
        <elementSetContainer>
          <elementSet elementSetId="4">
            <name>PDF Text</name>
            <description/>
            <elementContainer>
              <element elementId="52">
                <name>Text</name>
                <description/>
                <elementTextContainer>
                  <elementText elementTextId="3784">
                    <text>PRIKAZ

Prikaz međunarodne naučno-stručne konferencije: „Izgradnja
modernog pravnog sistema“
International Scientific Conference: „Establishment of a
Modern Legal System“ – Review
Mensur Zoletić, MA
Centar za društvena istraživanja Internacionalnog Burč univerziteta
e-mail: mensur.zoletic@ibu.edu.ba

(Internacionalni Burč univerzitet, Sarajevo, 24. oktobar 2014. godine)
(International Burch University, Sarajevo, 24th of October, 2014)
Dana 24. oktobra 2014. godine, na Internacionalnom Burč univerzitetu u
Sarajevu održana je međunarodna naučno-stručna konferencija na temu: „Izgradnja
modernog pravnog sistema“. Konferenciju su zajednički organizirali Centar za
društvena istraživanja Internacionalnog Burč univerziteta, pravni fakulteti iz Bosne i
Hercegovine (Sarajevo, Bihać, Zenica, Tuzla, Pravni fakultet Univerziteta „Džemal
Bijedić“ u Mostaru i Pravni fakultet Sveučilišta u Mostaru), te fakulteti za
kriminalistiku i sigurnosne studije Univerziteta u Sarajevu i Mariboru. Tendencija
Centra za društvena istraživanja kao voditelja projekta upravo i jeste u stvaranju
čvrste veze među predstavnicima pravnih fakulteta u našoj zemlji, a sukladno tome
organiziranju zajedničkih događaja koji će okupljati istaknute pravne praktičare i
akademske radnike.
Već na prvoj zajedničkoj konferenciji učešće je uzelo preko 250 pravnih
stručnjaka i istaknutih imena iz BiH, regiona i država Evropske unije (u daljem
tekstu: EU). Na ovom mjestu, prije svega, osjećamo potrebu istaći dolazak vrhunskih
stručnjaka poput g. Renate Winter, sudije Specijalnog suda Ujedinjenih nacija za
Sierra Leone i članice Komiteta za prava djeteta UN, prof. dr. Alenke Šelih,
profesorice sa Pravnog fakulteta Univerziteta u Ljubljani i članice Akademije nauka i
umjetnosti Slovenije, prof. dr. Friedera Dünkela sa Univerziteta u Greifswaldu, SR
Njemačka, prof. dr. Cirila Ribičiča sa Pravnog fakulteta Univerziteta u Ljubljani, kao
i brojnih drugih istaknutih profesora iz BiH i regiona.

Centar za društvena istraživanja | Godina 2 | Broj1

301

�Mensur Zoletić, MA

Prema programu rada, nakon svečanog otvaranja konferencije u kojem su se
obratili direktor Centra za društvena istraživanja g. Esad Oruč, dekani pravnih
fakulteta iz BiH, potom g. Ismet Trumić, direktor Centra za edukaciju sudija i
tužilaca FBiH, te g. Meddžida Kreso, predsjednica suda BiH, otvoren je radni dio
konferencije sa četiri tematska paralelna panela: a) Restorativna pravda: kretanja u
svijetu i Bosni i Hercegovini – prvi panel, b) Zakon o obligacionim odnosima i
Konvencija UN o međunarodnoj prodaji robe: dosadašnja iskustva i mogući putevi
razvoja - drugi panel, c) Uloga međunarodne zajednice u implementaciji Dejtonskog
mirovnog sporazuma - treći panel i, d) Uloga i značaj pravne države u procesu
evropskih integracija – četvrti panel.
U okviru prvog panela, organizirano je pet sesija u okviru kojih se
raspravljalo o različitim aspektima restorativne pravde. Prvom sesijom je moderirala
prof. dr. Alenka Šelih, te se u ovom dijelu govorilo o svjetskim tendencijama i
kretanjima u oblasti restorativne pravde. Tako je g. Renate Winter govorila na temu
restorativne pravde za maloljetne učinioce krivičnih djela, dok je prof. dr. Dünkel
pružio osvrt na temu restorativne pravde i medijacije u krivičnim pitanjima u Evropi.
U okviru druge sesije, svoja izlaganja su imali prof. dr. Hajrija Sijerčić-Čolić na
temu: restorativna pravda za punoljetne učinioce krivičnih djela – stanje u BiH, mr.
iur. Dino Pivac koji je govorio o aspektima restorativne pravde u Republici
Hrvatskoj, te g. Nedžad Smailagić na temu kriminalnopolitičkih mogućnosti
restorativne pravde.
Treća sesija je započeta moderiranjem sudije Suda BiH g. Jasmine Kosović i
raspravljanjem o pitanjima vezanim za Zakon o zaštiti i postupanju sa djecom i
maloljetnicima u krivičnom postupku – aspekti restorativne pravde. U tom smislu g.
Kosović je istakla neophodnost harmonizacije pomenutog zakona sa propisima koji
ovu oblast reguliraju u entitetima i Brčko distriktu BiH, te edukacije ključnih aktera
krivičnog postupka u kontekstu pravilnog odabira i primjene odgojnih preporuka,
posebnog onih restorativnog karaktera. Nakon toga, uslijedila su izlaganja doc. dr.
Vedada Gurde sa Pravnog fakulteta u Tuzli (novine u oblasti alternativnih mjera i
sankcija u maloljetničkom krivičnom pravu u BiH), g. Smiljke Gavrić, medijatorke
Udruženja medijatora BiH (medijacijska praksa u BiH), g. Dragana Uletilovića,
sudije Osnovnog suda u Banjoj Luci (primjena medijacije prema Zakonu o zaštiti i
postupanju sa djecom i maloljetnicima u krivičnom postupku u RS: normativno i
stvarno), g. Aleksandre Jovanović (istraživanje u području restorativne pravde u radu
s maloljetnicima: iskustva iz SAD), te g. Merise Nurkić, tužiteljice Kantonalnog

302

Društveni ogledi - Časopis za pravnu teoriju i praksu

�Prikaz međunarodne naučno-stručne konferencije: „Izgradnja modernog pravnog sistema“

tužilaštva TK (osvrt na Zakon o zaštiti i postupanju sa djecom i maloljetnicima u
krivičnom postupku u FBiH).
U okviru posljednje dvije sesije, svoja izlaganja su imali doc. dr. Dževad
Mahmutović (Pravni fakultet Univerziteta u Tuzli) na temu restorativne pravde i
prava oštećenog u bosanskohercegovačkom okviru, dr. sci. Sanja Ćopić (Institut za
kriminološka i sociološka istraživanja Beograd) koja je govorila o zaštiti žrtava i
konceptu restorativne pravde sa tog ugla gledišta, mr. sci. Vildana Vranj (Pravni
fakultet Univerziteta u Sarajevu) na temu GRIP programa kao modela primjene
restorativne pravde u zatvorima u BiH, prof. dr. Irma Kovčo Vukadin (Edukacijskorehabilitacijski fakultet Sveučilišta u Zagrebu) o prevenciji nasilja u zatvorima, te
doc. dr. Darko Dimovski koji je govorio o restorativnog pravdi u zakonodavstvu
Republike Srbije.
U završnoj diskusiji prvog panela, doneseni su određeni zaključci u vidu
preporuka i to:
1) opšte preporuke:






donošenje odgovarajućih zakonskih i podzakonskih propisa o primjeni
elemenata restorativne pravde u Bosni i Hercegovini,
primjena restorativne pravde za čitavo područje Bosne i Hercegovine,
razvijanje potrebne infrastrukture u oblasti krivičnog pravosuđa
(policija, tužilaštvo, sud, kazneno-popravni zavodi),
razvoj infrastrukture u centrima za socijalnu rad,
sticanje posebnih znanja i kontinuirano stručno osposobljavanje i
usavršavanje iz oblasti restorativne pravde.

2) posebne preporuke:





približavanje restorativne pravde javnom mnijenju,
primjena restorativne pravde u preventivnom djelovanju u reakciji na
kriminalitet,
dosljedna primjena postojećih zakonskih rješenja o primjeni restorativne
pravde za maloljetne učinioce krivičnih djela,
razvijanje zakonskih rješenja o primjeni restorativne pravde za
punoljetne učinioce krivičnih djela,

Centar za društvena istraživanja | Godina 2 | Broj1

303

�Mensur Zoletić, MA








adaptacija ideje mirovnih vijeća u današnjim uslovima,
razvijanje saradnje između medija, krivičnog pravosuđa i Udruženja
medijatora u Bosni i Hercegovini,
primjenu medijacije treba uključiti u normative i standarde u radu
tužilaca i sudija,
zapošljavanje stručnih savjetnika suda i tužilaštva (socijalni pedagozi –
defektolozi, socijalni radnici, specijalni pedagozi–defektolozi i psiholozi
koji imaju aktivnu ulogu u predmetima maloljetničke delinkvencije),
podržavanje projekata o primjeni restorativne pravde u kaznenopopravnim zavodima (npr., GRIP program).

Drugi panel započeo je izlaganjem prof. dr. Abedin Bikić ispred Pravnog
fakulteta Univerziteta u Sarajevu pružanjem generalnog osvrta o pitanjima Zakona o
obligacionim odnosima i Konvencije UN o međunarodnoj prodaji robe. U okviru
prve sesije, učesnici su imali priliku saslušati prof. dr. Ratka Brnabića (Pravni fakultet
Sveučilišta u Splitu) koji je govorio na temu sklapanja ugovora o međunarodnoj
kupoprodaji prema Bečkoj konvenciji i ostalim izvorima prava kupoprodaje
Republike Hrvatske, prof. dr. Melihu Povlakić (Pravni fakultet Univerziteta u
Sarajevu) – aktuelna pitanja zaštite korisnika finansijskih usluga u pravu BiH, i doc.
dr. Almedinu Šabić (Pravni fakultet u Sarajevu) koja je zaključila prvu sesiju
izlaganjem o raskidu ugovora prema UN konvenciji.
U okviru druge sesije, učesnicima su izloženi teoretski aspekti odgovornosti
dobavljača za ispunjenje obaveza iz posla finansijskog lizinga u domaćem pravu i
praksi (prof. dr. Enes Bikić i mr. sci. Alaudin Brkić), kao i uloga i značaj načela
povjerenja u procesu reforme zemljišnoknjižnog prava (doc. dr. Hamid Mutapčić).
Sa praktičnog aspekta svoje izlaganje je predstavio g. Almir Gagula, advokat, na temu
zloupotrebe prava u obligacionom pravu BiH.
Na konferenciji je održan i jedan oblik „sajma knjige“. Naime, više od 10
izdavača iz Bosne i Hercegovine uključujući i pravne fakultete kao suorganizatore
događaja, predstavilo je i promoviralo pravnu literaturu iz okvira svoje izdavačke
djelatnosti.
Treći panel je ponudio zanimljive i aktuelne referate iz oblasti ustavnog
prava. Tačnije, rasprava se vodila o ulozi međunarodne zajednice u implementaciji
Dejtonskog mirovnog sporazuma, a panelom je moderirao doc. dr. Zlatan Begić sa
Pravnog fakulteta Univerziteta u Tuzli. Prof. dr. Ciril Ribičič je analizirao presudu
304

Društveni ogledi - Časopis za pravnu teoriju i praksu

�Prikaz međunarodne naučno-stručne konferencije: „Izgradnja modernog pravnog sistema“

Sejdić-Finci i njeno mjesto u kontekstu cjelovite ustavne reforme, pri čemu je istakao
razloge nemoći/nepostojanja volje međunarodne zajednice da „primora“ BiH vlasti
na implementaciju navedene presude. U okviru prve sesije, još su referate izložili
prof. dr. Dejan Pavlović (Fakultet političkih nauka Univerziteta u Beogradu) na
temu mogućeg doprinosa Ustavnog suda BiH u implementaciji presude Sejdić-Finci,
doc. dr. Dženeta Miraščić (Pravni fakultet Univerziteta u Tuzli) o pitanju
odgovornosti Visokog predstavnika međunarodne zajednice za BiH kao pitanju
pravne ili političke prirode, i mr. sci. Jasminka Džumhur (Ombudsmen za ljudska
prava BiH) na temu uloge međunarodne zajednice u implementaciji Dejtonskog
mirovnog sporazuma sa aspekta ljudskih prava.
Druga sesija je započela referatom prof. dr. Zlatana Delića sa Univerziteta u
Tuzli. G. Delić je govorio o sociološkopravnim aspektima i razmišljanima o
razlozima (ne)implementacije Dejtonskog mirovnog sporazuma. U okviru ovog
dijela, učesnicima su izlaganja predstavili i doc. dr. Zlatan Begić o perspektivama
ustavne pozicije konstitutivnih naroda u BiH u kontekstu odluka Evropskog suda za
ljudska prava, te mr. sci. Elmida Burina na temu Schmittovog suverena u kontekstu
konstelacije odnosa u BiH.
U završnoj diskusiji, ponajviše se govorilo o pojmu i opsegu prava
konstitutivnih naroda u BiH, i problemima koji su konstantno prisutni u pogledu
blokade implementacije presude Sejdić-Finci.
Na četvrtom panelu pod nazivom „Uloga i značaj pravne države u procesu
EU integracija“, izložen je najveći broj referata o različitim aspektima usklađivanja
BiH zakonodavstva kao preduslova pristupu Evropskoj uniji. Panelom je moderirao
prof. dr. Enes Hašić sa Pravnog fakulteta Univerziteta u Zenici. Prva sesija je
započela izlaganjem prof. dr. Zijada Hasića (Pravni fakultet Univerziteta u Travniku)
o aspektima jačanja uloge parlamenata u BiH u kontekstu jačanja pravne države u
EU integracijama. Izlaganja temeljena na sličnoj problematici su nastavili mr. sci.
Maja Rimac-Bjelobrk (Direkcija za evropske integracije Vijeća ministara BiH), prof.
dr. Nedžad Bašić (Pravni fakultet Bihać), dr. sci. Sanja Bazina (Direkcija za evropske
integracije Vijeća ministara BiH), dr. Jadranka Polović (Visoka škola multimedijskih
i komunikacijskih tehnologija, TV Akademija, Split) o iskustvima Republike
Hrvatske na putu ka EU, prof. dr. Edin Rizvanović (Pravni fakultet „Džemal
Bijedić“ u Mostaru) na temu normativne funkcije države u okviru procesa
integracije, dok je sesiju zaključio doc. dr. Benjamin Flander (Fakultet za
kriminalistiku i sigurnosne studije Univerziteta u Mariboru) na temu
Centar za društvena istraživanja | Godina 2 | Broj1

305

�Mensur Zoletić, MA

postmodernizacije i krize prava: pravni sistem i pravna država u „vrlom novom
svijetu“.
U okviru druge sesije, referate su predstavili prof. dr. Tadija Bubalović
(Pravni fakultet Sveučilišta u Rijeci) o pojmu i oblicima međunarodne
krivičnopravne pomoći, prof. dr. Adnan Duraković (Pravni fakultet Univerziteta u
Zenici) na temu: uloga i značaj krize na funkcionisanje pravne države i njenih
politika, doc. dr. Eldan Mujanović (Fakultet za kriminalistiku, kriminologiju i
sigurnosne studije Univerziteta u Sarajevu) o pitanjima oduzimanja imovinske koristi
pribavljene krivičnim djelom u BiH. Također, izlaganja su imali i doc. dr. Nataša
Deretić (Pravni fakultet Univerziteta u Novom Sadu), doc. dr. Amila Ferhatović
(Pravni fakultet Univerziteta u Sarajevu), dr. Milica Kovačević (Fakultet za
specijalnu edukaciju i rehabilitaciju Univerziteta u Beogradu), mr. sci. Ajdin
Huseinspahić (Pravni fakultet Univerziteta u Zenici), i Selma Stočanin-Hrustemović
(Fakultet za kriminalistiku, kriminologiju i sigurnosne studije).
Posljednja sesija je također ponudila nekoliko referata. Prof. dr. Halil Kalač
je otvorio završni dio izlaganjem o socijalnoj tržišnoj ekonomiji EU, a u nastavku su
uslijedili referati dr. Gorana Obradovića (Pravni fakultet Univerziteta u Nišu), doc.
dr. Spahije Kozlića (Pravni fakultet Univerziteta u Zenici), mr. sci. Aide Mulalić
(Pravni fakultet Univerziteta u Zenici), mr. sc. Uroša Zdravkovića (Pravni fakultet
Univerziteta u Nišu), dok je sesiju zaključio Haris Hasić, MA (Pravni fakultet
Univerziteta u Travniku) na temu problema u mehanizmima provođenja zaštite
intelektualnog vlasništva kao prepreke evropskoj integraciji Bosne i Hercegovine.
Nakon diskusija i zaključaka na pojedinim panelima, učesnici su
prisustvovali zajedničkom zatvaranju konferencije. U završnom obraćanju, domaćin i
organizator se zahvalio svima na participaciji i značajnom doprinosu konferenciji, a
suorganizatorima su dodijeljene zahvalnice. Također, izražena je želja da konferencija
na temu: „Izgradnja modernog pravnog sistema“ postane tradicionalna, što će Centar
za društvena istraživanja nastojati i ispuniti.

306

Društveni ogledi - Časopis za pravnu teoriju i praksu

�</text>
                  </elementText>
                </elementTextContainer>
              </element>
            </elementContainer>
          </elementSet>
        </elementSetContainer>
      </file>
    </fileContainer>
    <elementSetContainer>
      <elementSet elementSetId="1">
        <name>Dublin Core</name>
        <description>The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.</description>
        <elementContainer>
          <element elementId="79">
            <name>Extent</name>
            <description>The size or duration of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3778">
                <text>2884</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="50">
            <name>Title</name>
            <description>A name given to the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3779">
                <text>International Scientific Conference: „Establishment of a  Modern Legal System“ – Review</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="96">
            <name>Author</name>
            <description>Author</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3780">
                <text>ZOLETIC, MENSUR</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="94">
            <name>Abstract</name>
            <description>A summary of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3781">
                <text>Dana 24. oktobra 2014. godine, na Internacionalnom Burč univerzitetu u  Sarajevu održana je međunarodna naučno-stručna konferencija na temu: „Izgradnja  modernog pravnog sistema“. Konferenciju su zajednički organizirali Centar za  društvena istraživanja Internacionalnog Burč univerziteta, pravni fakulteti iz Bosne i  Hercegovine (Sarajevo, Bihać, Zenica, Tuzla, Pravni fakultet Univerziteta „Džemal  Bijedić“ u Mostaru i Pravni fakultet Sveučilišta u Mostaru), te fakulteti za  kriminalistiku i sigurnosne studije Univerziteta u Sarajevu i Mariboru. Tendencija  Centra za društvena istraživanja kao voditelja projekta upravo i jeste u stvaranju  čvrste veze među predstavnicima pravnih fakulteta u našoj zemlji, a sukladno tome  organiziranju zajedničkih događaja koji će okupljati istaknute pravne praktičare i  akademske radnike.</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="40">
            <name>Date</name>
            <description>A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3782">
                <text>2015</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="97">
            <name>Keywords</name>
            <description>Keywords.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3783">
                <text>Article
PeerReviewed</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
        </elementContainer>
      </elementSet>
    </elementSetContainer>
    <tagContainer>
      <tag tagId="19">
        <name>K Law (General)</name>
      </tag>
    </tagContainer>
  </item>
  <item itemId="493" public="1" featured="0">
    <fileContainer>
      <file fileId="516">
        <src>https://omeka.ibu.edu.ba/files/original/ebbd9a820b08f57ab3bdbcb75eb8566e.pdf</src>
        <authentication>eb587bc4bbd0396eea38965f92453e91</authentication>
        <elementSetContainer>
          <elementSet elementSetId="4">
            <name>PDF Text</name>
            <description/>
            <elementContainer>
              <element elementId="52">
                <name>Text</name>
                <description/>
                <elementTextContainer>
                  <elementText elementTextId="3792">
                    <text>Journal of Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics

Implementing a Listening and Speaking Curriculum in a
Linguistically Homogenous English for Academic Purposes
Program
Clare J. Zuraw
Michigan Technological University, United States of America
Submitted: 15.04.2014.
Accepted: 01.11.2014.
Abstract
Linguistic homogeneity in English for Academic Purposes (EAP) programs can be a
challenge to curriculum design and implementation. In university EAP programs
where the majority of students share an L1 with classmates, instructors sometimes
struggle to balance the use of the L1 and L2 in class. Despite the potential for
immersion, students in these settings may also socialize primarily in their L1 rather
than English, the target language. These factors demand special consideration in
courses focused on oral production and comprehension where sustained interaction
and negotiation of meaning is crucial. Ninety percent of the students in the Intensive
English as a Second Language Program at Michigan Technological University come
from China and share an L1. In this context, the classroom provides important
opportunities for interaction and negotiation of meaning in the target language. The
program recently redesigned, piloted, and evaluated a new curriculum. Using
examples from the curriculum and the classroom to present this case, I argue that
linguistically homogeneous classrooms focusing on oral and aural communication
require different curricula than more diverse EAP settings. Examples from the
development and delivery of the new listening and speaking curriculum are
potentially applicable in both ESL and EFL settings.
Keywords: Curriculum development, EAP, EFL, oral communication, higher
education

Introduction
In the United States, 64% of students inIntensive English Programs (IEP)came from
the top four sending countries: Saudi Arabia (29.9%), China (15.9%), South Korea
(9.4%), Japan (9.1%). In American universities more the 28% of international
students came from China in 2012, a 21.4% increase from the previous year
(Farrugia&amp; Bhandari, 2013).In this context, it is not uncommon for university IEPs
51

�Implementing a Listening and Speaking Curriculum in a Linguistically Homogenous English for
Academic Purposes Program

to have large groups of students who share a first language. Linguistic homogeneity
in IEPs can be a challenge to curriculum design and implementation.
For many IEP students, the stakes of language learning are high, with admission to
and success in degree programs hinging on their ability to communicate in English.
Concerns over money and time may be distracting stressors that can influence
students in and out of the classroom (Yang &amp; Berliner, 2013).Despite the immersion
setting of an American university campus, students with networks of friends who
share their L1 may get their primary exposure to English in the classroom. For their
instructors, negotiating the use of L1 and L2 in the classroom can be challenging.
The Intensive English as a Second Language Program (IESL) at Michigan
Technological University (MTU) serves international students conditionally admitted
to degree programs. Ninety percent of the studentsin the program between 2011 and
2014came from China. The faculty recently redesigned, piloted, and evaluated a new
curriculum. The listening and speaking courses in this new curriculum were
developed to address the specific needs of linguistically homogenous classes that are
typical in the program. This case is an illustration of how linguistically homogenous
classrooms focusing on oral and aural communication skills require curricula
designed specifically with the role of interaction in mind.
Mackey (2012) suggests that the connections between instructors and researchers
studying interaction are strong andencourages engagement between the two groups.
This paper will explore some of the ways that interaction research has informed the
design and delivery of the curriculum. The examples of activities and assessment
tools from the new listening and speaking curriculum could be adapted to fit both
EFL and other ESL settings.

IESL at Michigan Technological University
Students in the IESL program at MTU are required to study English and meet
standardized testing benchmarks before they can enroll exclusively in academic
courses. Internal needs analyses have shown that to succeed in academic classes,
students must be able to use English to write academic research essays, read
extensively, understand lectures, and actively collaborate as group members. As a
pipeline program, students are under pressure from family-members and peers to
complete English training as quickly as possible in order to move on to academic
classes to save money. Instructors are seen as gatekeepers and their decisions to pass
a student out of the IESL program indicates that he/she has a high enough level of
English proficiency to begin academic classes.

52

�Journal of Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics

During the 2013-2014 academic year 97% of IESL students were from China and
over the last three years 90% of all students in the program were Chinese. In most
cases students share Mandarin Chinese as an L1.1 The linguistic homogeneity in this
setting is similar to many English as a Foreign Language (EFL) classrooms. As in
some EFL settings, the students’ learning goals are usually not oriented towards
community integration as they might be in other North American ESL settings
(Nayar, 1997). While some students hope to work in the United States after
graduation, many plan to return to China with their degrees.In other ways the
situation is unique. While EFL instructors often grapple with the challenge of
finding authentic language, real-world applications, and opportunities for students to
interact with English speakers, most students in an IESL program in the United
States are surrounded by campus communities who use English daily. Despite these
opportunities for immersion, not all students seek them out. At MTU students spend
18-24 hours each week in a classroom with other IESL students and often form
friendships within this group. For students who socialize and study in their L1, the
IESL classroom can be their primary opportunity for sustained interaction in the
target language.
Research has shown that English only policies in the classroom do not necessarily
enhance language learning and that attempting to eliminate L1 from the classroom
would be ineffective (Auerbach, 1993; Levine, 2003). At the same time, there is
strong evidence that L2 interactionsupports language learning (Mackey, 2012). The
IESL program at MTU does not have an English only policy and each instructor
balances L1 and L2 differently to achieve the program mission of preparing students
for academic success. Along with tasks like essay writing and extensive reading,
some of that success is based upon their ability interact in English with both NS and
NNS. Listening and speaking instruction in the programseeks to prepare students for
communicative academic tasks in the target language and as a result, some classroom
tasks, particularly those focused on interaction, requires the use of L2. It is in this
context that the faculty redesigned and implemented the new curriculum during the
2013-2014 academic year.

The Curriculum: Task design and the Role of Interaction
Before the curriculum was redesigned, the faculty conducted a needs analysis to
determine what skills students would need to use in academic classes after exiting the
IESL program. Long and Norris (2009) categorizeneeds analysis to identify “target
tasks” as the first step in task-based language teaching program design, writing that
1

There have been some exceptions, with a handful of students identifying Cantonese or Tibetan as their
first language. However, these students typically speak Mandarin Chinese in addition to their L1 and
English.

53

�Implementing a Listening and Speaking Curriculum in a Linguistically Homogenous English for
Academic Purposes Program

these tasks are “the real-world things people do in everyday life” (p. 137). Course
goals, objectives, and outcomes were written with these real-world tasks in mind. In
the case of MTU students, everyday life is focused on the university.In surveys of
university faculty,one of several skills identified as important was the ability to
communicate and collaborate with members of a group. For this reason, one of the
exit outcomes for students leaving the IESL program was dedicated to this skill:
Students will be able to participate actively and mediate communication breakdown
in classroom discussions and small group settings.All listening and speaking
curriculum documents include objectives and outcomes related to group work and/or
the negotiation of meaning.
Research and the Curriculum in the Classroom
Like many EAPcurricula, the listening and speaking courses at MTU include a focus
on listening comprehension, particularly academic lectures. The role of input in
these courses is an important part of curriculum and classroom activity design. To
prepare students for lectures and lab courses, the IESL program includes listening
practice ranging from simple modified texts through complex authentic oral texts.
But listening comprehension is only one aspect of the course and Long (1996) asserts
that “comprehensible input alone is insufficient” (p.422).
Research shows that interaction in the target language is crucial for learners and
plays an important role in the ESL classroom (Mackey, 2012; Pica, Young, &amp;
Doughty, 1987). Interaction and the negotiation of meaning cause the learner to make
“interactional adjustments” and draw their attention to form (Long, 1996 p. 451).
The type and context of the interaction is also important and can be adapted to fit
learner needs (Mackey, 2012). In the IESL program interaction plays an important
role in the listening and speaking curriculum and in classroom work. Onefactor
influencing the design of interactive tasks is the cultural background of students.
Some research suggests that students coming from educational systems that do not
focus on communicative classroom techniques can be skeptical of interactive
activities (Rao, 2002). Our experience at MTU has been that some students do
struggle to adapt to a more interactive classroom environment, but that most of them
come to see the interaction as an important part of their learning. In an anonymous
program evaluation survey conducted in fall 2013, students identified positive results
from interactive activities. Students commented that they can speak more
confidently, better comprehend NS, and that they “liked communications with
teachers and classmates.” A key to getting learners to accept student-centered
interaction is to design activities that they find engaging and to explain the purpose
and goals of interactive tasks. The best examples of are graded formal student
discussions.
54

�Journal of Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics

Formal Student-led Discussions
At all levels of listening and speaking, students participate in graded classroom
discussions. These are designed to motivate students to interact and negotiate
meaning in the target language. Sustaining discourse in the TL can be difficultin
linguistically homogenous classrooms, especially at lower proficiency levels, but
students have responded well to these activities.Students prepare a text – oral or
written – before class. In class they hold a discussion on that text with little or no
input from the instructor. How the discussion is organized depends on the level.
Early on, code-switching is common. As students build confidence they are better
able to maintain interaction in English. At the intermediate level, discussion
questions are “crowd-sourced” from the group. All students submit questions for
discussion which the instructor organizes and distributes at the beginning of the
activity. At the advanced and transitional levels, one student is responsible for
preparing and leading the discussion but the complexity of the text is differentiated.
Students are graded on their participation, ability to make connections to the text,
turn-taking and negotiation, and their production of comprehensible output.
In these student-led discussions the task is open; consensus is not necessary (Mackey
2012). Open tasks give students the chance to spend time exploring a topic and
controlling discourse (Willis, 2004). Willis points out that SLA researchers have
typically favored closed tasks, but that open tasks may have their place:
When planning a TBI program, teachers would need to decide which kinds
of tasks best reflect target language use or which kinds best help students
achieve an established language-acquisition goal. In the case of language for
academic purposes, this is certainly likely to involve open tasks. (p. 24)
Gass, Behney&amp;Plonsky (2013) emphasize that “conversational interaction in an L2
forms the basis for the development of language, rather than being only a forum for
practice of specific language features” (p.378).Graded formal classroom discussions
engage students in the L2 rather than L1, which can benefit their language
development while strengthening their ability to navigate American classroom
culture. The kind of task and interaction in the classroom matters not only to the
students’ learning but also their perception of the learning experience. In the fall
2013 surveys students again gave positive feedback on classroom discussion and
identified personal language development related to fluency and comprehension.
Interaction with Native Speakers
55

�Implementing a Listening and Speaking Curriculum in a Linguistically Homogenous English for
Academic Purposes Program

Student-led discussions focus on NNS-NNS interactions, but research has shown that
interactions with a NS can be even more valuable for student noticing and
modification (Gass&amp;Varonis, 1994). In a study by Gass and Varonis (1994) NNS
who were allowed to interact were able to give clearer directions, especially after
interacting with a NS. Interaction with NSs must be incorporated into classroom
activities and teacher-fronted work sometimes plays a role. In addition to student-led
discussions, teachers may lead discussions, especially when the focus is on form or
when consensus is necessary. Teachers also interact with students in one-on-one
conferences for formative assessment purposes. These conferences are typically
designed around a task like editing a presentation, but also provide students
opportunities to interact with a NS.
Another setting for program-organized interaction is the Conversation Partners
Program. Each semester, IESL faculty match volunteers from the campus
community with an IESL student or small group. They are required to meet for a
minimum of ten hours each semester and their participation counts as part of their
listening and speaking course grade. This interaction is typically between a NS and a
NNS. The guidelines encourage participants to avoid doing using the time as a
tutoring session. Instead, the goal of the program is for students to practice authentic
interaction with a native speaker.
Presentational skills also play an important role in the curriculum. The presentations
themselves are primarily a performance rather than interactive task, but it is possible
to design the requirements for a presentation to involve interaction. Group
presentations can provide an opportunity for L2 interaction with partners to
accomplish a series of tasks in preparation for a presentation, but if all students share
an L1 they are unlikely to primarily use English to accomplish the tasks. One way to
ensure interaction in the L1 is to require students to conduct interviews as part of
their research for a presentation. In Intermediate Listening and Speaking, students
give informational presentations about either their academic major or introducing the
audience to the local community. If they choose to present on their major they are
required to interview one professor or two students who do not share their L1. Those
giving a presentation about the local community conduct interviews with employees
of local businesses, students, or other community members. This turns out to be a
motivational experience for many students who have reported that they felt better
prepared to communicate with native speakers after the project.

Conclusion
Interaction is an important part of language learning and should play a central role in
the design of EAP curricula, particularly in courses where the focus is on listening
56

�Journal of Foreign Language Teaching and Applied Linguistics

and speaking. This is especially important, and potentially challenging, in
linguistically homogenous classrooms where students can interact easily in their
shared L1. Through carefully designed interactive tasks like those described in this
paper, instructors can provide learners with authentic opportunities for L2
interaction.
Several issues have come up in this case study that cannot be addressed adequately in
this forum. More research into the trend towards Chinese majority EAP programs in
the U.S. and how this influences curriculum design and classroom practice will be
important for program administrators and faculty.Further research into roles of
motivation and social integration in linguistically homogenous EAP programs could
also contribute to a better understanding of student learning. The more accessible
and relevant that interaction research is the more likely instructors will be to
incorporate findings into their curriculum and their classrooms.

References
Auerbach, E.R. (1993). Reexamining English only in the ESL classroom.TESOL
Quarterly, 27(1), 9-32.
Farrugia, C.A. &amp; Bhandari, R. (2013).Open doors 2013 report on international
educational exchange. New York: Institute of International Education.
Gass, S. M., Behney, J., &amp;Plonsky, L. (2013).Second language acquisition: An
introductory course. New York: Routledge.
Gass, S.M. &amp;Varonis, E.M. (1994). Input, interaction, and second language
production.Studies in Second Language Acquisition, 16, 283-302.
Levine, G. S. (2003). Student and instructor beliefs and attitudes about target
language use, first language use, and anxiety: Report of a questionnaire
study. The Modern Language Journal, 87(3), 343-364.
Long, M.H. (1996).The Role of the linguistic environment in second language
acquisition.In W.C. Ritchie &amp; T.K. Bhatia (Eds.), Handbook of second
language acquisition(pp. 413-468). San Diego: Academic Press.
Long, M. &amp; Norris, J.(2009). Task based teaching and assessment. In K.van den
Branden, M. Bygate, &amp; J.M Norris. (Eds.) Task-based language teaching: A
reader (pp. 135-142). Amsterdam/Philadelphia: John Benjamins Publishing
Company.
57

�Implementing a Listening and Speaking Curriculum in a Linguistically Homogenous English for
Academic Purposes Program

Mackey, A. (2012). Input, Interaction, and Corrective Feedback in L2 Learning.
Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Nayar, P.B. (1997). ESL/EFL Dichotomy today: Language politics or pragmatics?
TESOL Quarterly, 31(1), 9-37.
Pica, T., Young, R., &amp; Doughty, C. (1987).The impact of interaction on
comprehension.TESOL Quarterly, 21(4), 737-758.
Rao, Z. (2002). Chinese students’ perceptions of communicative and noncommunicative activities in EFL classrooms.System, 30(1), 85-100.
Willis, J.R. (2004). Perspectives on task-based instruction: Understanding our
practices, acknowledging different practitioners. InB.L. Leaver&amp; J.R.
Willis(Eds.) Task-based instruction in foreign language education (pp.3-44).
Washington, DC: Georgetown University Press.
Yan, K., &amp; Berliner, D. C. (2013).Chinese international students' personal and
sociocultural stressors in the United States.Journal of College Student
Development, 54(1), 62-84.

58

�</text>
                  </elementText>
                </elementTextContainer>
              </element>
            </elementContainer>
          </elementSet>
        </elementSetContainer>
      </file>
    </fileContainer>
    <elementSetContainer>
      <elementSet elementSetId="1">
        <name>Dublin Core</name>
        <description>The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.</description>
        <elementContainer>
          <element elementId="79">
            <name>Extent</name>
            <description>The size or duration of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3785">
                <text>2785</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="50">
            <name>Title</name>
            <description>A name given to the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3786">
                <text>Implementing a Listening and Speaking Curriculum in a Linguistically Homogenous English for Academic Purposes Program</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="96">
            <name>Author</name>
            <description>Author</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3787">
                <text>Zuraw, Clare J.</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="94">
            <name>Abstract</name>
            <description>A summary of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3788">
                <text>Linguistic homogeneity in English for Academic Purposes (EAP) programs can be a challenge to curriculum design and implementation. In university EAP programs where the majority of students share an L1 with classmates, instructors sometimes struggle to balance the use of the L1 and L2 in class. Despite the potential for immersion, students in these settings may also socialize primarily in their L1 rather than English, the target language.  These factors demand special consideration in courses focused on oral production and comprehension where sustained interaction and negotiation of meaning is crucial. Ninety percent of the students in the Intensive English as a Second Language Program at Michigan Technological University come from China and share an L1. In this context, the classroom provides important opportunities for interaction and negotiation of meaning in the target language.  The program recently redesigned, piloted, and evaluated a new curriculum.  Using examples from the curriculum and the classroom to present this case, I argue that linguistically homogeneous classrooms focusing on oral and aural communication require different curricula than more diverse EAP settings.  Examples from the development and delivery of the new listening and speaking curriculum are potentially applicable in both ESL and EFL settings.    Keywords: Curriculum development, EAP, EFL, oral communication, higher education</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="45">
            <name>Publisher</name>
            <description>An entity responsible for making the resource available</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3789">
                <text>International Burch University</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="40">
            <name>Date</name>
            <description>A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3790">
                <text>2015</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="97">
            <name>Keywords</name>
            <description>Keywords.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3791">
                <text>Article
PeerReviewed</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
        </elementContainer>
      </elementSet>
    </elementSetContainer>
    <tagContainer>
      <tag tagId="72">
        <name>L Education (General),LD Individual institutions (United States)</name>
      </tag>
    </tagContainer>
  </item>
  <item itemId="494" public="1" featured="0">
    <fileContainer>
      <file fileId="517">
        <src>https://omeka.ibu.edu.ba/files/original/a97116320d786ae59722d197c7a4aa2f.pdf</src>
        <authentication>e696e430c6163f34a0b2b71fa0ee21cc</authentication>
        <elementSetContainer>
          <elementSet elementSetId="4">
            <name>PDF Text</name>
            <description/>
            <elementContainer>
              <element elementId="52">
                <name>Text</name>
                <description/>
                <elementTextContainer>
                  <elementText elementTextId="3800">
                    <text>Journal of Economic and Social Studies

Priorities for Corporate Social Responsibility Reporting:
Evidence from Listed Turkish Companies in Istanbul Stock
Exchange
Melek Çetinkaya
Afyon Kocatepe University
Afyonkarahisar, Turkey
mlcetinkaya@hotmail.com
Veysel Ağca
Afyon Kocatepe University
Afyonkarahisar, Turkey
agca@aku.edu.tr
Hatice Özutku
Afyon Kocatepe University
Afyonkarahisar, Turkey
hozutku@aku.edu.tr
Abstract: This study is based on “stakeholder theory” in order to
explain the concept of corporate social responsibility. To examine
the social responsibility areas of business organizations, “The
Pyramid of Corporate Social Responsibility” model developed by
Carroll (1991) was used in this study. According to this model,
entire range of business responsibilities can be considered in four
groups: economic, legal, ethical and philanthropic. Within the
framework of Carroll’s corporate social responsibility (CSR)
Pyramid, the aim of this study is to illustrate priorities in
Corporate Social Responsibility Report of the leading companies
in Turkey. In this context, 48 companies from Borsa Istanbul
(BIST) Corporate Governance Index were selected as the sample
of the study. Qualitative research approach was used in the
study. The data obtained from the annual reports, sustainability
reports and corporate governance compliance reports of these 48
companies were subjected to content analysis. According to the
findings, economic and legal responsibilities were found to have
priority for shareholders, customers and employees stakeholder
groups in terms of corporate social responsibility levels. While
philanthropic responsibility was found to have priority for
community stakeholder group, economic responsibility is
important for suppliers stakeholder group. Legal responsibility,
on the other hand, is important for environment stakeholder
group. In general, economic and legal responsibilities have
priorities in all stakeholder groups other than community
stakeholder group.

Volume 5 Number 1 Spring 2015

Key words:
Corporate Social
Responsibility; The Pyramid of
Corporate Social Responsibility
JEL Classification: M10, M14
Article History
Submitted: 21 May 2015
Resubmitted: 21 August 2015
Resubmitted: 10 September 2015
Accepted: 14 September 2015
http://dx.doi.org/10.14706/
JECOSS15525

1

�Melek Çetinkaya, Veysel Ağca, Hatice Özutku

Introduction
An early definition of Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) by European Commission
was “a concept whereby companies integrate social and environmental concerns in
their business operations and in their interaction with their stakeholders on a voluntary
basis” (Commission of the European Communities, 2001: 3). The Commission
modified this definition in 2011 as “the responsibility of enterprises for their impacts
on society”. In order to fulfil corporate social responsibility, business organizations
must have a process that integrates social, environmental, ethical and human rights,
and consumer expectations into their business operations and core strategy to get close
relationships with social partners (Commission of the European Communities, 2011:
6). According to this definition, it is clear that business organizations have more duties
than the official expectations, such as investing in human capital and the environment.
Global environmental problems such as climate change, vanishing natural resources and
pollution have made corporate social responsibility an important agenda of business
world (Harrison and Freeman, 1999; Dincer and Dincer, 2007). The definition and
content of CSR change in different contexts. A company should take its stakeholders’
needs into consideration when planning its CSR programmes. Since CSR will always
have a location-based nature, a company should understand the priorities of local
stakeholders (Welford, Chan and Man, 2007: 52).
Environmental concerns of the consumers and the increasing interest in CSR since the
1970’s brought CSR into the discussion of the academic and business world (Harrison
and Freeman, 1999; Dincer and Dincer, 2007). Although the term ‘corporate social
responsibility’ is still widely used, terms such as corporate citizenship, business ethics,
stakeholder management and sustainability offer competing, complementary and
overlapping concepts to cover the field (Carroll and Shabana, 2010: 86).
The purpose of this study is to analyse the nature of CSR. A descriptive analysis based
on CSR Pyramid developed by Carroll was used for the Turkish context. The CSR
Pyramid which can be labeled as to be the most well known model for corporate social
responsibility emphasize the importance of economic, legal, ethical and philanthropic
responsibilities with its four levels. None the less, analysis of CSR in Turkey may
provide an opportunity to examine the relevance of CSR Pyramid priorities in Turkish
context to the conventional American ordering when Carroll’s basic four part model is
taken into consideration.
Corporate Social Responsibility and Organizational Stakeholders
The content and definition of CSR has always been a most debated subject (Dahlsrud,
2008: 2; Moir, 2001: 19). As a result of these debates, different perspectives flourished
in the field of CSR. Among these perspectives on CSR, Ozuem et al. (2014: 400) put
forward some theoretical perspectives as agency theory, the stakeholder theory, the
stewardship theory, a resource-based view of the firm, the institutional theory and the
strategic leadership theory.

2

Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�Priorities for Corporate Social Responsibility Reporting: Evidence from Listed Turkish Companies in
Istanbul Stock Exchange

The history of CSR goes a long way back. The modern era of CSR is dated back
to 1950s by Carroll (1999: 268). Although the attempts to define CSR flourished
during the 1960s and especially in 1970s, the definitions of CSR became more specific
while different approaches on corporate social responsiveness and corporate social
performance (CSP) began to flourish. However, the 1980s saw fewer new definitions,
more empirical research, and an increase on alternative themes such as corporate
social performance, stakeholder theory and business ethics theory. In the 1990s, CSR
continued to serve on the same basis but it was transformed through alternative thematic
frameworks such as stakeholder theory, business ethics theory, CSP, and corporate
citizenship. The analysis of definitions showed that these concepts were appealing to
the same dimensions of CSR (Dahlsrud, 2008: 4). Grouping the phrases which refer to
the same dimensions gave out five dimensions, namely as the environmental dimension
(The natural environment), the social dimension (The relationship between business
and society), the economic dimension (Socio-economic or financial aspects, describing
CSR in terms of business operations), the stakeholder dimension (Stakeholders or
stakeholder groups) and the voluntariness dimension (Actions not prescribed by law).
Acting responsibly is important for any firm doing business. Two theories of CSR offer
definitions for responsibility. According to the definition based on shareholder theory
managers should make decisions that maximize the wealth of their firms’ stockholders.
On the other hand, the definition based on stakeholder theory argues that rather
than maximizing the prosperity of their owners, firms have duties towards the society.
Ultimately, this debate on the definition of responsibility changed its direction towards
deciding the amount a firm should spend for acting responsibly (Wu, 2014: 286).
The concepts of corporate citizenship, corporate sustainability, stakeholder
management, environmental management, business ethics and corporate social
performance are studied under CSR. Carroll defines social responsibility as the entire
range of obligations a business has towards the society in terms of the economic, legal,
ethical, and discretionary categories of business performance (1979: 497). According
to this definition, there are four dimensions of CSR namely as economic, legal, ethical
and discretionary (philanthropic) responsibilities. Although these four constituent
parts of CSR reflect the viewpoints related to earlier definitions, it represents the social
responsibilities of businesses in more details. Thus Carroll’s definition has been the
most widely accepted one among a vast number of definitions in the literature of CSR
(Visser, 2005: 33).
Carroll presents economic, legal, ethical and philanthropic dimensions of CSR on
the model of “The Pyramid of Corporate Social Responsibility” and argues that not
only economic and legal responsibility dimensions have been a part of CSR but all
four responsibility dimensions have always existed to some extent while ethical and
philanthropic functions have taken a significant position just in recent years (Carroll,
1991).

Volume 5 Number 1 Fall 2015

3

�Melek Çetinkaya, Veysel Ağca, Hatice Özutku

The pyramid of corporate social responsibility is presented in Figure 1. As can be
seen, economic responsibilities component is the foundation block of the other three
components. Obeying the laws, or playing by the rules, is the second most important
dimension because the law is society’s codification of acceptable and unacceptable
behavior. Ethical responsibilities lies on the next level and covers being just and
fair, discern what is right or wrong in order to avoid doing harm or to protect the
stakeholders which are the employees, consumers, the environment, and others.
Ultimately, philanthropic responsibilities focusing on being a good corporate citizen
lie at the top of the CSR pyramid. These benevolent activities include contributing
financial and human resources to the community and improving the quality of life.
No CSR pyramid is perfect without one of these four components. They cannot be
separated from one other but here and elsewhere, they are taken into consideration
individually in order to discuss their specific nature. Moreover, as Carroll argues
(1991: 42), “a consideration of the separate components helps the manager see that the
different types of obligations are in a constant but dynamic tension with one another”.
Figure 1. The Pyramid of Corporate Social Responsibility

Source: Carroll, A. (1991), “The Pyramid of Corporate Social Responsibility: Toward
the Moral Management of Organizational Stakeholders”, Business Horizons.
According to recent literature on CSR, it is important to have a dialogue with stakeholders
in order to protect the interests of stakeholders and to have conformity between the
stakeholders and schemes of sustainable development and business strategy. In their
study, Romolini et al. (2014: 67) argue that stakeholders, in turn, are less influenced
by an entity’s financial performance alone and more influenced by their perception
that sustainability is critical to an entity’s financial performance and to fulfilling the

4

Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�Priorities for Corporate Social Responsibility Reporting: Evidence from Listed Turkish Companies in
Istanbul Stock Exchange

implicit contract between the entity and society. In this study, theoretical perspectives
of stakeholders have been taken into consideration. According to a stakeholder-oriented
perspective, organizations exist within networks of stakeholders and face potentially
conflicting demands from these stakeholders and have to adapt stakeholders’ demands
into the core policies of CSR. In his study on CSR, Dahlsrud (2008: 4) argues that the
stakeholder dimension covers “interaction with their stakeholders”, “how organizations
interact with their employees, suppliers, customers and communities” and “treating the
stakeholders of the firm”.
First proposed by Freeman in 1984, stakeholder theory focuses on the strategic
management of organizations in the late twentieth century. Numerous studies in
literature, especially those of Clarkson (1995), Donaldson and Preston (1995),
Mitchell et al. (1997) helped the theory to flourish and develop (Mainardes et al.,
2012: 1862). Although they may offer different definitions and interpretations, all
these studies, in their core, follow the definition of Freeman (1984) and reflect the
same principle to a greater or lesser extent: the company should take into consideration
the needs, interests and influences of people and groups, who either impact on or may
be impacted by its policies and operations. According to Freeman’s (1984) definition,
individuals or groups may influence or be influenced by the scope of organizational
objectives. Within this concept, a person, an informal group, an organization or an
institution may all be stakeholders (Mainardes et al., 2011: 228).
Moir (2001: 19) argues that the stakeholder theory can be used as a basis to analyse
those groups to whom the firm should be responsible. A literature review reveals various
proposals for classifying stakeholders by their respective level of importance (Clarkson,
1995: 106; Donaldson and Preston, 1995: 68; Mainardes et al., 2012: 1865; Ozuem
et al., 2014: 400; Trebeck, 2008: 352).
Stakeholders are important for companies in some sense because they have an
influence on company performance. For this reason, companies try to respond to their
stakeholders’ demands in economic, formal or political frames. Stakeholders may have
different levels of priorities for companies at different times but according to literature,
there is some stability in the pattern of priority of stakeholders. Also, the stage of
business and expectations of businesses may be different in different countries although
they may be in the same field. Moreover different orientations can be observed in
corporate environments of different countries. Pinkston and Carroll (1994: 165),
who studied the conditions of markets in England, France, Germany, Japan, Sweden,
Switzerland and the US, argue that stakeholders have different levels of importance
in different countries. For example, while the focus is on economic responsibilities
to owners in England, the focus shifts to company-employee relations in France and
Germany, and to nurturing the business-community relationships in Japan. Naturally,
because of the differences in these business relationships, stakeholder priorities can
also be different. Thus, the stakeholder groups studied in the samples appeared to be
prioritized in the same order while communities and government stakeholders ranked
lower than the other threestakeholder groups of employees, consumers, and owners
(Pinkston and Carroll, 1994: 161).

Volume 5 Number 1 Fall 2015

5

�Melek Çetinkaya, Veysel Ağca, Hatice Özutku

The terms of “stakeholder” and “social responsibility” have close relationships in terms
of corporate social responsibility. The connection between these two terms derives
from the vague content of the term “social” and the concept of “stakeholder” denotes
to social or societal responsibilities of a company (Carroll, 1991: 43). Ozuem et al.
(2014: 400) argue that according to stakeholder-oriented perception, organizations
exist within networks of stakeholders and they aim to meet potentially conflicting
demands of these stakeholders in terms of CSR objectives and policies. The duty of the
management of a stakeholder oriented business is difficult because the managers have
to make a settlement between their objectives and the expectations and demands of the
stakeholders. While doing this, they have to meet the demands of main stakeholders
in the first place and the remaining groups later. Although it is not always possible
to satisfy all the parties at the same time, it is important for a company to protect
its long-term interests. Carroll (1991: 43) assumes that the functions of stakeholder
management are to describe, understand, analyse, and finally to manage. Carroll poses
five questions to understand stakeholder management:
1. Who are our stakeholders?
2. What are their stakes?
3. What opportunities and challenges are presented by our stakeholders?
4. What corporate social responsibilities (economic, legal, ethical, and philanthropic)
do we have to our stakeholders?
5. What strategies, actions, or decisions should we take to best deal with these
responsibilities?
These questions can be discussed in details but attention must be given to what kind
of responsibilities does a company have towards its stakeholders (Carroll, 1991: 43). A
conceptional framework of stakeholder/responsibility matrix on this topic is presented
in Figure 2.
Figure 2. Stakeholder/Responsibility Matrix
Types of CSR

Economic

Legal

Ethical

Philanthropic

Stakeholders
Owners
Customers
Employees
Community
Competitors
Suppliers
Social Activist Groups

6

Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�Priorities for Corporate Social Responsibility Reporting: Evidence from Listed Turkish Companies in
Istanbul Stock Exchange

Public at Large
Others

Source: Carroll, 1991: 44
By looking and working on this matrix, a manager can decide on how to act in different
types of corporate social responsibility environments by taking different stakeholder
groups into consideration. For each cell, the manager can gather analytical data and use
them “for developing priorities and making both long-term and short-term decisions
involving multiple stakeholders’ interests” (Carroll, 1991: 44).
However, Pinkston and Carroll (1994) made a little alteration on this classification
regarding the stakeholder groups in one of later studies. In their study on international
businesses in different countries, Pinkston and Carroll (1994: 161) renamed stakeholder
groups as owners, consumers, employees, communities and government. They argued
that the perceived relative importance of the organizations’ stakeholder groups will
differ across firms by countries-of-origin.
Purpose and Importance of the Research
Most of the research on Carroll’s (1991) CSR Pyramid has been in an American context.
Nevertheless, several of the empirical studies already discussed suggest that culture may
have an important influence on perceived CSR priorities (Visser, 2005). Within the
framework of Carroll’s CSR Pyramid (1991), this study aims to find out CSR priorities
of companies listed in the Corporate Governance Index of Borsa Istanbul (BIST)
which apply corporate management principles. In order to realize this aim, economic,
legal, ethical and philantrophic responsibilities are placed on stakeholder/responsibility
matrix based on Carroll’s Corporate Social Responsibility Pyramid and the distribution
of stakeholder groups according to their responsibility fields is investigated. It has been
observed that no previous study in the literature of the field has attempted to place
these four responsibilities on stakeholder/responsibility matrix. From this perspective,
it can be said that this study is of great importance with its pioneering aspects.
Methodology of the Research
The research in this study was carried out using the qualitative research method. Extreme
case sampling (Patton, 2002) was carried out by selecting Turkish companies with the best
corporate social responsibility performance. A similar criterion for selecting companies
was used by previous studies in order to analyze CSR (Collison et al., 2008; Lankoski,
2008; Romolini et al., 2014). The sample of the research is composed of 48 companies,
which trade in Borsa Istanbul (BIST) and listed in Corporate Governance Index. BIST
Corporate Governance Index (XKURY) is an index which includes the companies that
apply Corporate Governance Principlesi. Corporate Governance Principles in Turkey
are constituted by Capital Markets Board by taking primarily the “OECD Corporate
Governance Principles” of 1999 into consideration. Corporate Governance Principles
are made up of four parts: (1) Shareholders, (2) Public Disclosure and Transparency, (3)
Stakeholders, (4) Board of Directors. An important portion of corporate governance

Volume 5 Number 1 Fall 2015

7

�Melek Çetinkaya, Veysel Ağca, Hatice Özutku

principles are about the responsibilities of companies towards stakeholdersii. For this
reason, sampling for the study has been chosen from companies within Corporate
Governence Index which lists companies with high corporate social responsibility
performance. In the attainment of data, “Annual Reports”, “Sustainability Reports”,
and “Corporate Governance Compliance Reports”, which are presented as “public
domain” information in the websites of the so-called companies, were taken as a basis.
Content analysis method was used in the analysis of the data.
Content analysis necessitates the information in the content of a text (or report) to
be coded within the framework of pre-described categories, as quantitatively and
qualitatively (Guthrie and Abeysekera, 2006: 117). With this method, percentage
distribution of the information presented in a report (or a text) is measured, by being
classified (coded) according to categories (Loberet et al., 1997: 59). Quantitative
measurements obtained as a result of coding can be used as data in other kinds of
analyses (Hackston and Milne, 1996: 84). For information related to corporate social
responsibility which will be coded in content analysis, categories need to be formed
and corporate social responsibility information types which will be included in these
categories need to be determined. Carroll’s (1991) study was taken into consideration
for defining the social responsibility areas in the content analysis. Business practices
defined by Spiller (2000) were taken into consideration in order to identify the business
practices related to the expectations of stakeholder groups.
Content Analysis Process
In order to determine the categories and classifications of corporate social responsibility
information types according to these categories, which will be used in the execution
of this research and application of content analysis technique, literature review
was completed and the following basic and sub categories were formed based on
the information and categories in the studies of Carroll (1991) and Spiller (2000).
Moreover, studies of Carroll (1991), Pinkston and Carroll (1994), Clarkson
(1995), Donaldson and Preston (1995) and Trebeck (2008) were considered for the
identification of stakeholder groups. Accordingly, stakeholder groups were taken into
account as shareholders, consumers, employees, communities, suppliers, governments
and others.
Social Responsibility Areas of Business Organizations
To examine the social responsibility areas of business organizations, “The Pyramid
of Corporate Social Responsibility” model developed by Carroll (1991) was used in
this study. According to this model, entire range of business responsibilities can be
considered in four groups: economic, legal, ethical and philanthropic (Figure 3).

8

Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�Priorities for Corporate Social Responsibility Reporting: Evidence from Listed Turkish Companies in
Istanbul Stock Exchange

Figure 3. Economic, Legal, Ethical and Philanthropic Responsibilities
Economic Components (Responsibilities)

Legal Components (Responsibilities)

1. It is important to perform in a manner consistent with maximizing earnings per share.

1. It is important to perform in a manner consistent with the expectations of government and law.

2. It is important to be committed to being as
profitable as possible.

2. It is important to comply with various federal,
state and local regulations.

3. It is important to maintain a strong competitive position.

3. It is important to be a law-abiding corporate
citizen.

4. It is important to maintain a high level of
operating efficiency.

4. It is important that a successful firm be defined
as one that fulfils its legal obligations.

5. It is important that a successful firm be defined 5. It is important to provide goods and services
as one that is consistently profitable.
that at least meet minimal legal requirements.

Ethical Components (Responsibilities)

Philanthropic Components (Responsibilities)

1. It is important to perform in a manner consistent with expectations of societal mores and
ethical norms.

1. It is important to perform in a manner consistent with the philanthropic and charitable expectations of society.

2. It is important to recognize and respect new or
evolving ethical/moral norms adopted by society.

2. It is important to assist the fine and performing arts.

3. It is important to prevent ethical norms from
being compromised in order to achieve corporate
goals.

3. It is important that managers and employees
participate in voluntary and charitable activities
within their local communities.

4. It is important that good corporate citizenship
be defined as doing what is expected morally or
ethically.

4. It is important to provide assistance to private
and public educational institutions.

5. It is important to recognize that corporate
integrity and ethical behavior go beyond mere
compliance with laws and regulations.

5. It is important to assist voluntarily projects that
enhance a community’s “quality of life”.

Source: Carroll (1991)
Business Practices Related to the Expectations of Stakeholder Groups
In order to determine the expectations of stakeholder groups within the context of
corporate social responsibility in content analysis, the study of Spiller (2000) was taken
into consideration. This study of Spiller (2000), which defines important business
practices regarding each important stakeholder group, is one of the most detailed
studies conducted about stakeholder groups’ expectations as part of corporate social

Volume 5 Number 1 Fall 2015

9

�Melek Çetinkaya, Veysel Ağca, Hatice Özutku

responsibility practices. Spiller (2000) specified stakeholder groups that constitute
primary priority for a business and claimed that organizational practices, which appear
in accordance with the expectations of these groups, can be used in determining the
corporate social responsibility performance of a business. This study has been beneficial
for many researches about corporate social responsibility practices.
To guide implementation, Spiller (2000: 153-154) has identified ten key business
practices for each of the six main stakeholder groups: community; environment;
employees; customers; suppliers, and shareholders (Figure 4). The list of 60 practices
summarised below is neither exhaustive, nor uncontroversial. However, it does provide
a starting point, a menu from which companies can choose, preferably in conjunction
with their stakeholders, the areas on which to focus.
Figure 4. Key Business Practices for Each ofthe Six Main Stakeholder Groups
1. Community
1.1. Generous financial donations
1.2. Innovative giving
1.3. Support for education and job training
programmes
1.4. Direct involvement in community
projects and affairs
1.5. Community volunteer programmes
1.6. Support for the local community
1.7. Campaigning for environmental and
social change
1.8. An employee-led approach to
philanthropy
1.9. Efficient and effective community activity
1.10. Disclosure of environmental and social
performance

2. Environment
2.1. Environmental policies, organization and
management
2.2. Materials policy of reduction, reuse and recycling
2.3. Monitoring, minimising and taking responsibility
for releases to the environment
2.4. Waste management
2.5. Energy conservation
2.6. Effective emergency response
2.7. Public dialogue and disclosure
2.8. Product stewardship
2.9. Environmental requirements for suppliers
2.10. Environmental audits

3. Employees
3.1. Fair remuneration
3.2. Effective communication
3.3. Learning and development opportunities
3.4. Fulfilling work
3.5. A healthy and safe work environment
3.6. Equal employment opportunities
3.7. Job security
3.8. Competent leadership
3.9. Community spirit
3.10. Social mission integration

4. Customers
4.1. Industry-leading quality programme
4.2. Value for money
4.3. Truthful promotion
4.4. Full product disclosure
4.5. Leadership in research and development
4.6. Minimal packaging
4.7. Rapid and respectful responses to customer
comments, complaints and concerns
4.8. Customer dialogue
4.9. Safe products
4.10. Environmentally and socially responsible
production and product composition

10

Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�Priorities for Corporate Social Responsibility Reporting: Evidence from Listed Turkish Companies in
Istanbul Stock Exchange

5. Suppliers
5.1. Develop and maintain long-term
purchasing relationships
5.2. Clear expectations
5.3. Pay fair prices and bills according to
terms agreed upon
5.4. Fair and competent handling of conflicts
and disputes
5.5.
Reliable
anticipated
purchasing
requirements
5.6. Encouragement to provide innovative
suggestions
5.7. Assist suppliers to improve their
environmental and social performance
5.8. Utilise local suppliers
5.9. Sourcing from minority-owned suppliers
5.10. Inclusion of an environmental and social
element in the selection of suppliers

6. Shareholders
6.1. Good rate of long-term return to shareholders
6.2. Disseminate comprehensive and clear information
6.3. Encourage staff ownership of shares
6.4. Develop and build relationships with shareholders
6.5. Clear dividend policy and payment of appropriate
dividends
6.6. Corporate governance issues are well managed
6.7. Access to company’s directors and senior managers
6.8. Annual report and accounts provide a
comprehensive picture of the company’s overall
performance
6.9. Clear long-term business strategy
6.10. Open communication with the financial
community

Source: Spiller, 2000: 153-154.

Stakeholder/Responsibility Matrix
Business practices devoted to meet the expectations of stakeholder groups for corporate
social responsibility areas defined by Carroll and which responsibilities become
prominent in which stakeholder groups were defined in the content analysis, based
on the Stakeholder/Responsibility Matrix of Carroll (1991). None the less, besides
Carroll’s (1991) study, stakeholder groups to be considered in the matrix were
identified by considering Pinkston and Carroll (1994), Clarkson (1995), Donaldson
and Preston (1995), Spiller (2000) and Trebeck’s (2008) classifications. According to
this, stakeholder groups were taken into consideration as shareholders, consumers,
employees, communities, suppliers and others. As a result of the assessment done by
the authors of the study, business practices related to the expectations of the stakeholder
groups (Spiller, 2000) were placed in economic, legal, ethical and philanthropic areas
in the stakeholder/responsibility matrix. By this way, a framework was formed in order
to evaluate the findings obtained from the content analysis.
Figure 5: Stakeholder/Responsibility Matrix
Types of CSR

Economic

Legal

Ethical

Philanthropic

Stakeholders
Shareholders
Customers
Employees

Volume 5 Number 1 Fall 2015

11

�Melek Çetinkaya, Veysel Ağca, Hatice Özutku

Community
Suppliers
Others

Findings of the Research and Evaluation of Findings
The data attained from the content analysis was analysed with the help of SPSS 20.0
Windows program. How often and at what level the information about corporate
social responsibility took place in the related report was determined as number and
percentage, and emerging frequency tables were interpreted. During the process of
putting data into codes, “1” was used for coding the practices present in the categories
considered in the content analysis and “2” was used for coding the practices which
are not present in the businesses. Additionally, in terms of sector information,
service sector was coded as “1” and manufacturing sector was coded as “2”. 27 of
the businesses taking place in the sample operate in service sector, while 21 of them
operate in manufacturing sector.
Frequency and percentage values belonging to business practices about the expectations
of stakeholder groups are presented in Figure 6. Hereunder, business practices falling
within shareholders groups are seen to be over 90%. Businesses perform their legal
responsibilities against their shareholders to a large extent. Of the practices in economic
area, “Open communication with the financial Community” is seen to be over 65% and
others are seen to be over 83%. Economic practices of companies as “Clear long-term
business strategy” and “Clear dividend policy and payment of appropriate dividends”
oriented to shareholders stakeholder group ate at 90% level.
Among the economic practices taking place in customers stakeholder group, “Customer
dialogue” is seen to be at level 87.5%, “Environmentally and socially responsible
production and product composition” is seen to be at level 83% and “safe products” is
seen to be at level 79%. Businesses perform their responsibilities against their customers
in the economic area. Of their responsibilities in legal area, “Truthful promotion” is at
level 67% while “Minimal packaging” is at the level of 33%. The fact that this practice
is used only in manufacturing businesses should be considered in minimal packaging
radio to be low. Ethically, “Rapid and respectful responses to customer comments,
complaints and concerns” is at level 79% and “Value for Money” is at level 44%. It is
observed that businesses do not stress on the “Money” concept much, which is directed
to customers stakeholder group.
Of the practices falling within employees stakeholder group, economically “Learning
and development opportunities” was emphasized as 96% and legally “A healthy and
safe work environment” was emphasized as 94%. In the ethical responsibility area,
“Fulfilling work” and “Competent leadership” were mentioned at 60%, “Community
spirit” at 75%, and “Fair remuneration” and “Equal employment opportunities” were
mentioned over 83%. It is regarded that practices in employees stakeholder group were
given a quite high importance.

12

Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�Priorities for Corporate Social Responsibility Reporting: Evidence from Listed Turkish Companies in
Istanbul Stock Exchange

Business practices in community stakeholder group are seen to be at 35% in the
economic area with “Disclosure of environmental and social performance” at 35%
and at 73% in the ethical area of “Innovative giving”. In the philanthropic area, the
practice that has the highest level is “Direct involvement in community projects
and affairs” with 88% and the practice that has the lowest level is “An employee-led
approach to philanthropy” with 48%. It can be stated that businesses act sensitive
about philanthropic practices in community stakeholder group.
Businesses do not seem to give much place to information related to suppliers
stakeholder group. The most emphasized practice in economic area is “Encouragement
to provide innovative suggestions” with a level of 48%. The most emphasized practice
in ethical area is “Inclusion of an environmental and social element in the selection of
suppliers” with a level of 40%, and the most emphasized practice in philanthropic area
is “Assist suppliers to improve their environmental and social performance” with a level
of 40%. Other practices seem to be even lower than this level.
Practices under the title of Environment were encountered mostly in the stakeholder
group named as Others. The most mentioned practice in economic practices
area is “Environmental policies, organization and management” with a level of
83%. “Environmental requirements for suppliers” is seen to be at level 37% and
“Environmental audits” is seen to be at level 35%. The practice in legal area is “Public
dialogue and disclosure” at a level of 60%.
Whether a difference exists between expectations of stakeholder groups and related
business practices from the point of sectors of the businesses taking place in the
research was analysed via t-test. As a result of the analysis, business practices falling
within stakeholder groups did not show a significant difference between service sector
and manufacturing sector.

Volume 5 Number 1 Fall 2015

13

�Melek Çetinkaya, Veysel Ağca, Hatice Özutku

Figure 6. Stakeholder/Responsibility Matrix in Turkey Sample

14

Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�Priorities for Corporate Social Responsibility Reporting: Evidence from Listed Turkish Companies in
Istanbul Stock Exchange

According to findings obtained from this research, economic and legal responsibilities
were determined to have priority in shareholders, customers and employees stakeholder
groups in terms of corporate social responsibility levels. Philanthropic responsibility was
determined to be primary in community stakeholder group, economic responsibility
was seen to be primary in suppliers stakeholder group, and legal responsibility was
seen to be primary in environment stakeholder group. In general, economic and
legal responsibilities were observed to have priority in all stakeholder groups, except
community stakeholder group. Findings obtained reveal that corporate social
responsibility practices of businesses taking place in Turkey research sample are wide
enough to include stakeholder groups, other than suppliers.
In Turkey, companies traditionally perform corporate social responsibility practices
for long years within the framework of philanthropy. As a matter of fact, many
businesses materialize their politics in this direction through various projects, such
as awarding scholarships to students, sponsoring sports and art activities. Although
social responsibility programs do not improve in private sector as fast as in the world,
they have a different status lately. Non-governmental organizations, which developed
quickly especially in 1990s, lead the supports of companies in social areas, in which
education projects comes first on a more substantial ground with sustainability. On the
other hand, especially in previous years, many companies head towards professional
support for social responsibility programs. Non-governmental organizations enable the
support given to social-oriented projects in private sector to increase quickly. Nongovernmental organizations, which work with a transparent administrative mentality
and responsibility mission, establish a ground for the creation of social projects with
the leading companies of private sector. Social responsibility projects, which are
realised through a co-operation with non-governmental organizations, are seen to be
executed in areas such as education, sports, health, elderly, children and environment.
Besides this, several consultancy institutions are seen to function with the purpose of
supporting businesses in identifying social responsibility projects and in the process of
putting them into practice (Akgeyik, 2007: 82).
As the obtained findings are compared to the findings of prior studies in different
countries, similar results were attained in some aspects, while different ones were
obtained in others. For instance, in their study which includes England, France,
Germany, Japan, Sweden, Switzerland and the US, Pinkston and Carroll (1994) put
forward that the importance given to stakeholders differed according to countries.
England has been shown to emphasize economic responsibilities to owners in its
business community. France, on the other hand, has been understood to focus on
company employee relations, as has Germany. The Japanese environment has appeared
to nurture the business-community relationships. Since these relationships can be
noticeably different in any given business environment, the stakeholder priorities were
expected to be different for the sample organizations.
One of the conspicuous findings of the study is the lack of corporate social responsibility
practices regarding the suppliers stakeholder group. A similar situation exists in the
findings of the studies that were conducted in other countries. For example, several

Volume 5 Number 1 Fall 2015

15

�Melek Çetinkaya, Veysel Ağca, Hatice Özutku

empirical studies in Europe, North America and Asia have investigated how firms
work with CSR-related issues in their supply chains. Most of these studies are not
only confined to large multinational corporations, but also include SMEs. According
to the results attained, despite many companies’ efforts to engage in CSR-related
activities in their supply chains, there is often a gap between the ethical standards
expressed and the actual conditions at the suppliers (Andersen and Larsen, 2009: 78).
In today’s competitive business environment, it has become imperative for firms to
find ways to work collaboratively with suppliers. Moreover, it has been shown that
firm-supplier cooperation and partnership can help all supply-chain members to
increase performance. Additionally, ethical behavior in the firm-supplier relationship
will generate trust and better communication – attributes which can result in greater
competitiveness and wealth creation (Gonzalez et al., 2013: 373).
Conclusion
This study is based on “stakeholder theory” to explain the concept of corporate social
responsibility levels in Turkey. To examine the social responsibility areas of business
organizations, “The Pyramid of Corporate Social Responsibility” model developed
by Carroll (1991) was used in this study. According to this model, entire range of
business responsibilities can be considered in four groups: economic, legal, ethical and
philanthropic. Within the framework of Carroll’s corporate social responsibility (CSR)
Pyramid, the aim of this study is to illustrate priorities (highlight issues and areas) in
Corporate Social Responsibility of the leading companies in Turkey. In this context,
48 companies were selected as the sample of the study in the Borsa Istanbul (BIST)
Corporate Governance Index. The research was carried out using the qualitative research
method. In the attainment of data, “Annual Reports”, “Sustainability Reports”, and
“Corporate Governance Compliance Reports”, which are “public domain” information
published in the websites of the so-called companies, were taken as a basis. Content
analysis method was used in the analysis of the data.
According to the findings of this study, economic and legal responsibilities were
determined to have priority in shareholders, customers and employees stakeholder
groups in terms of corporate social responsibility levels. Among the companies which
fall into the scope the study, responsibilities outstanding in the field of economic
responsibilities for shareholders are: “Good rate of long-term return to shareholders”,
“Clear dividend policy and payment of appropriate dividends”, “Clear long-term
business strategy”, “Open communication with the financial Community”. The
important topics for shareholders in terms of legal responsibilities are: “Disseminate
comprehensive and clear information”, “Corporate governance issues are well managed
and access to company’s directors and senior managers”, “Annual report and accounts
provide a comprehensive picture of the company’s overall performance”. For customers
stakeholder group, social responsibility topics on economic level are: “Industry-leading
quality programme”, “Customer dialogue”, “Safe products”, “Environmentally and
socially responsible production and product composition”. Legal responsibilities which
are important for customer stakeholder group are: “Truthful promotion” and “Minimal

16

Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�Priorities for Corporate Social Responsibility Reporting: Evidence from Listed Turkish Companies in
Istanbul Stock Exchange

packaging”. While the economic responsibilities which stand out for employees
stakeholder group are “Learning and development opportunities”, legal responbilities
which are important for the same group are “A healthy and safe work environment”.
Corporate social responsibility practices reflecting ethical and philanthropic
responsibility understanding were not seen to take place in shareholders stakeholder
group. Philanthropic responsibility mentality was seen not to fall within customers
and employees stakeholder groups. In community stakeholder group, on the other
hand, it is conspicuous that most of the corporate social responsibility practices are
performed within the context of philanthropic responsibility understanding and
ethical and economic mentalities remain in the background. It has been realised
that social responsibility practices taking place in suppliers stakeholder group are not
common, and current social responsibility practices reflect economic responsibility.
On the other hand, in the environment stakeholder group, legal responsibility was
identified to be primary. In general, economic and legal responsibilities were seen to
have priority in all stakeholder groups, except the community stakeholder group. The
findings obtained reveal that corporate social responsibilities of large companies in the
research sample of Turkey are wide enough to include all stakeholder groups other than
suppliers, and economic and legal responsibilities have priority in the corporate social
responsibility understanding. As a result, many companies embrace a CSR program as
a way to promote socially responsible actions and policies, and effectively respond to
stakeholder demands.
According to stakeholder theory, companies can achieve more positive results by paying
more attention to corporate social responsibility programs. Stakeholder theory suggests
that organizational survival and success is contingent on satisfying both its economic
(e.g. profit maximization) and non-economic (e.g. corporate social performance)
objectives by meeting the needs of the company’s various stakeholders. The stakeholder
management concept serves to ensure that organizations recognise, analyse and
examine the individual and group characteristics that influence or are influenced by
organizational behaviours and actions.
Future studies may include analyses of which stakeholder groups must be paid more
attention in the value creation process of organizations within the context of stakeholder
theory, what the contributions the stakeholders provide are and what the possible risks
related to stakeholders are, expectations of stakeholders and how processes that will
meet these expectations will be developed.

Volume 5 Number 1 Fall 2015

17

�Melek Çetinkaya, Veysel Ağca, Hatice Özutku

References
Akgeyik, T. (2007). The human resource management dimensions of corporate social
responsibility in Turkey: A survey. http://www.journals.istanbul.edu.tr/iusskd/article/
view/1023000164.
Andersen, M. &amp; Larsen, T.S. (2009). Corporate social responsibility in global supply
chains. Supply Chain Management: An International Journal. 14(2), 75 – 86.
Burton, B. K., Farh, J.L. &amp; Hegarty, W. H. (2000). A cross-cultural comparison of
corporate social responsibility orientation: Hong Kong vs. United States students.
Teaching Business Ethics, 4(2), 151-167.
Carroll, A. B. (1991). The pyramid of corporate social responsibility: toward the moral
management of organizational stakeholders. Business Horizons. 34(4), 39-48.
Carroll, A. B. &amp; Shabana, K. M. (2010). The business case for corporate social
responsibility: A review of concepts, research and practice. International Journal of
Management Reviews. 12(1), 85-105.
Carroll, A. B. (1979). A three-dimensional conceptual model of corporate performance.
Academy of Management Review, 4(4), 497-505.
Carroll, A. B. (1999). Corporate social responsibility evolution of a definitional
construct. Business &amp; Society. 38(3), 268-295.
Clarkson, M. B. E. (1995). A stakeholder framework for analyzing and evaluating
corporate social performance. Academy of Management Review, 20, 92-117.
Collison DJ, Cobb G, Power DM &amp; Stevenson LA. (2008). The financial performance
of the FTSE4 Good indices. Corporate Social Responsibility and Environmental
Management, 15, 14–28.
Commision of the European Communities, (2001: 3). http://www.ab.gov.tr/files/
ardb/evt/1_avrupa_birligi/1_6_raporlar/1_2_green_papers/com, 2001_green_paper_
promoting_a_european_framework_for_corporate_social_responsibility.pdf
Commision of the European Communities, (2011:6). http://ec.europa.eu/enterprise/
policies/sustainable-business/corporate-social-responsibility/index_en.htm
Dahlsrud, A. (2008). How corporate social responsibility is defined: An analysis of 37
definitions. Corporate Social Responsibility and Environmental Management, 15, 1–13.
Dincer, C. &amp; Dincer, B. (2007). Corporate social responsibility: Future prospects in
the Turkish context. Social Responsibility Journal, 3(3), 44 – 49.

18

Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�Priorities for Corporate Social Responsibility Reporting: Evidence from Listed Turkish Companies in
Istanbul Stock Exchange

Donaldson, T. &amp; Lee E. P. (1995). The stakeholder theory of the corporation: Concepts,
evidence, and implications, Academy of Management Review, 20(1), 65-91.
Freeman, R.E. (1984). Strategic Management: A Stakeholder Approach, Pitman
Publishing, Boston, MA.
González-Trejo, E.,
González-Salazar, N. M., Pedroza-Cantu, G. &amp; ElizondoArroyave, S.G. (2013). Corporate supply chain responsibility (CSCR). Journal of
Management Development, 32(4), 363 – 375.
Gupta, S. (2011). Consumer stakeholder view of corporate social responsibility: A
comparative analysis from USA and India. Social Responsibility Journal, 7(3), 363 –
380.
Guthrıe, J. &amp; Abeysekera, I. (2006). Content analysis of social, environmental
reporting: What is new?, Journal of Human Resource Costing and Accounting, 10(2),
114-126.
Gürol, Y., Büyükbalcı, P., Bal, Y., &amp; Ertemsır Berkın, E. (2010). Concept of corporate
social responsibility and an overview in developing countries. Istanbul University,
Journal of Political Science. 43, 135-162.
Hackston, D. &amp; Milne, J. M., (1996). Some determinants of social and environmental
disclosures in New Zealand companies. Accounting, Auditing and Accountability Journal,
9(1), 77-108.
Harrison, J. &amp; Freeman, R. (1999). Stakeholders, social responsibility and performance:
Empirical evidence and theoretical perspectives. Academy of Management Journal,
42(5), 479-485.
Hofstede, G. (1984). Culture’s Consequences: International Differences in Work-Related
Values, Sage Publications Beverly Hills, CA.
Hofstede, G. (1991), Cultures and Organizations: Software of the Mind, McGraw-Hill,
London.
http://borsaistanbul.com/en/indices/bist-stock-indices/corporate-governance-index
http://www.spk.gov.tr/indexcont.aspx?action=showpage&amp;menuid=10&amp;pid=0.
Kavut, L. (2010). Corporate governance, corporate social responsibility and
environmental reporting: Review of the environmental explanation of the ISE 100
companies. Istanbul University School of Management Journal, 66, 9-43.

Volume 5 Number 1 Fall 2015

19

�Melek Çetinkaya, Veysel Ağca, Hatice Özutku

Lankoski L. (2008). Corporate responsibility activities and economic performance: A
theory of why and how they are connected. Business Strategy and the Environment. 17,
536–547.
Lober, D.J., Bynum, D., Campbell, E., &amp; Jacques, M. (1997). The 100 plus corporate
environmental report study: A survey of an evolving environmental management tool.
Businell Strategy and the Environment, 6, 57-73.
Mainardes, E. W., Alves, H. &amp; Raposo, M. (2011). Stakeholder theory: Issues to
resolve, Management Decision. 49(2), 226 – 252.
Mainardes, E. W., Alves, H. &amp; Raposo, M. (2012). A model for stakeholder classification
and stakeholder relationships. Management Decision, 50(10), 1861 – 1879.
Mitchell, R. K., Bradley R. A. &amp; Donna J. W. (1997). Toward a theory of stakeholder
identification and salience: Defining the principle of who and what really counts.
Academy of Management Review, 22(4), 853-886.
Moir, L. (2001). What do we mean by corporate social responsibility? Corporate
Governance, 1(2), 16-22.
Ozuem; W., Howell, K. &amp; Lancaster, G. (2014). Corporate social responsibility:
Towards a context-specific perspective in developing countries. Social Responsibility
Journal, 10(3), 399 – 415.
Patton M.Q. (2002). Qualitative Research &amp; Evaluation Methods. Sage: Thousand
Oaks.
Pinkston, T. S. &amp; Carroll, A. B. (1994). Corporate citizenship perpectives and foreign
direct investment in the US. Journal of Business Ethics. 13(3), 157-169.
Pinkston, T. S. &amp; Carroll, A. B. (1996). A Retrospective examination of CSR
orientations: Have they changed? Journal of Business Ethics, 15(2), 199-206.
Romolini, A., Fissi, S. &amp; Gori, E. (2014). Scoring CSR reporting in listed companies
evidence from Italian best practices. Corporate Social Responsibility and Environmental
Management, 21, 65–81.
Sachs, S., Maurer, M., Rühli, E. &amp; Hoffmann, R. (2006). Corporate social
responsibility from a “Stakeholder View” perspective: CSR implementation by a Swiss
mobile telecommunication provider. Corporate Governance: The International Journal
of Business in Society, 6(4), 506 – 515.
Spence, L. &amp; Bourlakis, M. (2009). The evolution from corporate social responsibility
to supply chain responsibility: the Case of Waitrose. Supply Chain Management: An
International Journal, 14(4), 291 – 302.

20

Journal of Economic and Social Studies

�Priorities for Corporate Social Responsibility Reporting: Evidence from Listed Turkish Companies in
Istanbul Stock Exchange

Spiller, R. (2000). Ethical business and investment: a model for business and society.
Journal of Business Ethics. 27, 149-160.
Trebeck, K. (2008). Exploring the responsiveness of companies: corporate social
responsibility to stakeholders. Social Responsibility Journal, 4(3), 349 – 365.
Visser, W. (2005). Revisiting Carroll’s CSR Pyramid: An African Perspective, In E.R.
Pedersen &amp; M. Huniche and Economic Justice, Hyberabad: ICFAI University, 5-10,
2005.
Welford, R., Chan, C. &amp; Man, M. (2007). Priorities for corporate social responsibility:
a survey of businesses and their stakeholders. Corporate Social Responsibility and
Environmental Management, 15, 52–62.
Wu, J. (2014). The antecedents of corporate social and environmental irresponsibility.
Corporate Social Responsibility and Environmental Management, 21, 286–300.

i.
ii.

(http://www.borsaistanbul.com/en/indices/bist-stock-indices/corporate-governance-index)
(http://www.spk.gov.tr/indexcont.aspx?action=showpage&amp;menuid=10&amp;pid=0)

Volume 5 Number 1 Fall 2015

21

�</text>
                  </elementText>
                </elementTextContainer>
              </element>
            </elementContainer>
          </elementSet>
        </elementSetContainer>
      </file>
    </fileContainer>
    <elementSetContainer>
      <elementSet elementSetId="1">
        <name>Dublin Core</name>
        <description>The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/.</description>
        <elementContainer>
          <element elementId="79">
            <name>Extent</name>
            <description>The size or duration of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3793">
                <text>2945</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="50">
            <name>Title</name>
            <description>A name given to the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3794">
                <text>Priorities for Corporate Social Responsibility Reporting:  Evidence from Listed Turkish Companies in Istanbul Stock  Exchange</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="96">
            <name>Author</name>
            <description>Author</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3795">
                <text>ÇETİNKAYA, Melek
AĞCA, Veysel
ÖZUTKU, Hatice</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="94">
            <name>Abstract</name>
            <description>A summary of the resource.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3796">
                <text>Abstract: This study is based on “stakeholder theory” in order to explain the concept of corporate social responsibility. To examine the social responsibility areas of business organizations, “The Pyramid of Corporate Social Responsibility” model developed by Carroll (1991) was used in this study. According to this model, entire range of business responsibilities can be considered in four groups: economic, legal, ethical and philanthropic. Within the framework of Carroll’s corporate social responsibility (CSR) Pyramid, the aim of this study is to illustrate priorities in Corporate Social Responsibility Report of the leading companies in Turkey. In this context, 48 companies from Borsa Istanbul  (BIST) Corporate Governance Index were selected as the sample of the study. Qualitative research approach was used in the study. The data obtained from the annual reports, sustainability reports and corporate governance compliance reports of these 48 companies were subjected to content analysis. According to the findings, economic and legal responsibilities were found to have priority for shareholders, customers and employees stakeholder groups in terms of corporate social responsibility levels. While philanthropic responsibility was found to have priority for community stakeholder group, economic responsibility is important for suppliers stakeholder group. Legal responsibility, on the other hand, is important for environment stakeholder group. In general, economic and legal responsibilities have priorities in all stakeholder groups other than community stakeholder group.</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="45">
            <name>Publisher</name>
            <description>An entity responsible for making the resource available</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3797">
                <text>International Burch University</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="40">
            <name>Date</name>
            <description>A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3798">
                <text>2015</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
          <element elementId="97">
            <name>Keywords</name>
            <description>Keywords.</description>
            <elementTextContainer>
              <elementText elementTextId="3799">
                <text>Article
PeerReviewed</text>
              </elementText>
            </elementTextContainer>
          </element>
        </elementContainer>
      </elementSet>
    </elementSetContainer>
    <tagContainer>
      <tag tagId="17">
        <name>H Social Sciences (General),HB Economic Theory,HG Finance</name>
      </tag>
    </tagContainer>
  </item>
</itemContainer>
